EPA-R4-73-023e
July 1973
Environmental Monitoring Series
Reviews  of Current  Literature
on  Analytical Methodology
and Quality Control
          No. 18
                             Office of Research and Monitoring
                             U. S. Environmental Protection Agency
                             Washington, D. C.  20460

-------
                                      NOTICE


          This bulletin is prepared monthly by the staff of the Analytical
Methodology Information Center (AMIC), Information Systems Department, Battelle,
Columbus Laboratories, Columbus, Ohio, under EPA Contract No. 68-01-1832,
to inform personnel of the Analytical Quality Control Laboratory and other
segments of the National Analytical Methods Development Research Program of
recent publications on methodology.  Personnel associated with the center are
Mr. Ralph Darby, Project Director, Mr. Robert Little, Project Leader, and
Miss Verna Holoman, Abstractor.

          The 3" x 5" format of the citations and use of card stock is intended
to facilitate removal and filing of items of interest.  Because of space limi-
tations, the index terms accompanying the citations are selected from a complete
list as representative of the important concepts presented in each article.

          Comments and suggestions regarding the content of the "Reviews" or
requests from EPA personnel to be placed on the mailing list should be directed
to the Project Officer:

                          Mr. Luther Garrett
                          Data and Information Division
                          Office of Research and Development
                          Environmental Protection Agency
                          404 M Street, S.W.
                          Washington, D.C.  20024

-------
        REVIEWS OF CURRENT LITERATURE ON

   ANALYTICAL METHODOLOGY AND QUALITY CONTROL

                     No.  18
                       By
Analytical Methodology Information Center (AMIC)
          Information Systems Department
           Battelle Memorial Institute
     505 King Avenue, Columbus, Ohio  43201

             Contract No. 68-01-1832
                  Prepared for
        OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND MONITORING
      U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
             WASHINGTON, D.C.  20460

-------
             NATIONAL ANALYTICAL METHODS DEVELOPMENT RESEARCH PROGRAM
                       ANALYTICAL QUALITY CONTROL LABORATORY
                         REVIEWS OF CURRENT LITERATURE ON
                    ANALYTICAL METHODOLOGY AND QUALITY CONTROL


No. 18                                                               July  1973
Arrangement of the citations following the major research areas of the Analytical
Quality Control Laboratory and other segments of the National Analytical Methods
Development Research Program.  Items which apply to more than one area are cross-
referenced.
                                     CONTENTS
1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS                                      Page  1-30

    Scope;  Wet chemical methods; Nutrients; NTA; Trace raetalsi Helium glow;
    Chromatography (thin layer, gas, liquid); Spectroscopy (atomic absorption;
    flame emission, arc-spark., visible, UV, IR, fluorescent); Radiochemiatry;
    Automation of methods; Ion-specific and other probes; Mass spectrometry;
    Mass spectra; NMR; Instrument-computer interface; Chlorinated hydrocarbons
    (pesticides, PCB's, other); Trace organics; Petroleum processes (reforming,
    hydroforming, platforming, catalysts); Petroleum additives; Reduced crudes;
    Sulfur isotopes; Boiling range determination; Asphatenes and carboids;
    Weathering; Organometallics; Elemental analysis; Paraffinic distribution;
    Petroleum wastes; Water quality standards; Effluent monitoring.


2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS                                                 Page 31-49

    Scope;  Plankton; Periphyton; Macrophyton; Macroinvertebrates; Fish;
    Sample collection (grab samplers, artificial substrates);  Sample
    processing (preservation, staining, automatic and manual sorting and
    counting); Organisms identification (taxonomic keys, optical and electron
    microscopy, gas chromatography, electrophoresis, karyosystematics); Biomass
    measurements (drying, freeze-drying, ashing, ATP, DNA, chlorophyll measure-
    ment, calorimetry); Metabolic rates (primary productivity, respiration,
    electron transport, nitrogen fixation); Culturing; Biomonitoring;  Bioassay;
    Bioaccumulation of hazardous materials; Community structure  (indicator
    organisms, species diversity, community stability); Mathematical models;
    Statistical analysis.

-------
3.  MICROBIOLOGICAL METHODS                                            Page  50-54

    Scope;  Pollution indicators; Waterborne pathogens; Sampling; Detection;
    Identification; Enumeration; Monitoring; Survival; Automation; Instrumenta-
    tion; Cell counting; Selective and differential media; Growth factors;
    Metabolic products;  Membrane filter procedures; Microbiological standards;
    Specific bacteriophage; Fluorescent antibody techniques; Radioactive
    tracers; Antigen identification; Photomicroscopy;  Optical measurements;
    Data handling, presentation, and interpretation.


4.  METHODS AND PERFORMANCE EVALUATION                                 Page  55

    Scope;  Collaborative testing; Laboratory and analyst performance evaluation;
    Inter- and intralaboratory quality control; Evaluation of laboratory equip-
    ment; Statistical treatment of analytical data; Experimental design.


5.  INSTRUMENT DEVELOPMENT                                             page  56-60

    Scope;  Intake systems (methods of sampling, connecting lines, wells, motors,
    pumps, mode of operation); Sensors (electro-chemical, electro-biological,
    thermodynamic, mechanical, optical, nuclear); Analyzers (analog and digital
    amplifiers, output displays); Recording systems (telemetry,  data logging,
    digital data processors).
                                         ii

-------
                                                                          1.  PHYSICAL AMD CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-3789
"PARTICULATE  MANGANESE  IN 3EA WATER  STRESSING REGIMES IN MARINE ANOXIC BASINS",
Fluoric, E. J.,  University of Washington,  Seattle, Washington, Dissertation Abstracts
No. 73-3708,  1972,  150  pp.   (Complete report not available from AMIC.)

           A method  for  the analysis  of particulate Mn using emission speetroscopy was
developed  to  determine  the concentration of Mn  In suspended matter.   The distribution
of particulate Mn in  five anoxlc basins  was observed.  The differences and
similarities  Of  these basins are shown by  data  obtained on their  chemical and physical
characteristics.  In  addition,  the distributions of both particulate Mn and the
physical and  chemical variables were monitored  In Saanlch Inlet,  a basin whose
oxygen-hydrogen  sulfide regime  changes monthly.  The particulate  Mn  distribution in
the observed  basins showed a consistent  pattern which can be correlated to the oxygen
and hydrogen  sulfide  regime.  The results  indicate Mn exists mainly  In particulate
form in the oxygenated  water and in  a soluble form in water containing hydrogen
sulfide.   A model based on chemical  thermodynamics and inferred kinetics is proposed
to explain the distribution  of  particulate Mn in marine anoxic basin. The
concentrations of partlculate Mn in  the  open ocean were found to  be  low unless
Influenced by land runoff and the values of the Columbia River reflected the
particulate matter distribution described  by previous investigations.

INDEX TERMS:  Sea water, Manganese,  Dissolved oxygen. Distribution patterns, Hydrogen
      sulfide, Qnission spectroscopy.
AMIC-6929
"CHARACTERIZATION OF SWEET POTATO PROCESSING WASTES", Raines, B. W., North Carolina
State University, Raleigh, North Carolina, Dissertation Abstracts No. 73-1201, 1972,
78 pp.  (Complete report not available from AMIC)

          Characterization of liquid waste from sweet potato processing plants was
conducted in three stages.  These were:  1.  A study of waste strength as defined by
5-day biochemical oxygen demand, chemical oxygen demand (COD) and total carbon (TC).
2.  A study of the potential biodegradahillty of the waste via chemical determination
of Individual carbohydrate ccamponents.  3-  A study of the effect of acclimated versus
nonaccllmated seed organisms on the biochemical oxygen demand test.  The 'readily
biodegradable1 carbohydrate of sveet potato waste constituted 88 percent of the total
carbohydrate, dry weight basis and included sugars (17 percent), starch (56 percent) and
pectin gums and mucillages (15 percent).  Less 'readily biodegradable'  carbohydrates
were hemicelluloses (5 percent), cellulose (1 percent)  and llgnin (0.5  percent).   The
data demonstrated that substrate availability was not a limiting factor in the 5-day
BOD method for sweet potato waste.  Duplicate analyses  of acclimated seed versus'
unaccllmated seed organisms on BOD revealed little difference in results when  utilizing
culture material obtained from aerated raw sewage and one grown  under conditions
experienced In the BOD test.  'Most probable numbers' reached 5  million/ml In  one to
two days then rapidly decreased to 3000/ml at five days.   Preliminary investigations
indicated that nitrogen and/or phosphorus concentrations  In the  BOD analysis were
limiting to bacterial growth and may explain the  low BOD  results.

INDEX TERMS:  Industrial wastes, Food processing  industry, 3weet potatoes,  Character-
      ization, Biochemical oxygen demand, Chemical oxygen demand,  Carbohydrates,  Lignins.
AMIC-6571
"ASSESSING THE WATER POLLUTION POTENTIAL OF MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS", BerkOwitz, J. B. ,
Schimke, G. R., Valeri, V. R., Arthur D. Little  Incorporated, Cambridge, Massachusetts,
Report No. EPA-R2-73-179a, Contract No. 68-01-0102,   3"*PP-

          A Catalog has been  compiled of manufactured products which may,  during
their normal use or disposal, result In water pollution.  The Catalog  is In  three
sections, and the products are grouped in accordance with the Standard Industrial
Classification (SIC).  Section I sunmarizes the  pollution potential of each  listed
product group.  Section II provides data on typical chemical compositions  for each
product group and indicates the types of water-pollutional effects associated with each
chemical Ingredient,  Section III Inverts Section II by providing an alphabetical
listing of chemicals and the  SIC codes In which  they occur.  Aloag with the  Catalog, a
simple model has been developed to estimate rates of pollutant entry into  the waterways
via various routes, such as direct discharge, runoff following rainfall, leaching from
dumps, discharge to the air and subsequent raindown.  A guide including examples is
provided on how to use the Catalog and associated models to assess potential water
pollution problems arising from finished products in comon use.

INDEX TERMS:  Water pollution sources, Waste Identification, Path of pollutants,
      Discharge measurement, Model studies, Municipal wastes, Domestic wastes, Chemical
      properties, Physical properties, Manufactured products, Pollution potential,
      Chemical composition.
 AMIC-69U6
 "INVESTIGATION OF THE ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS  WHICH  AFFECT THE ANAEROBIC DECOMPOSITION
 OF FIBROUS SLUDGE BEDS ON  STREAM BOTTOMS", Springer,  A. M., Lawrence University,
 The Institute of Paper Chemistry, Appleton,  Wisconsin, Dissertation Abstracts No.
 73-7166, 1972, 178 pp.   (Complete report  not available from AMIC)

           Redistribution and decomposition of  fibrous sludge from paper mills have been
 studied in the lower Fox River between Lake  Winnebago and  Green Bay, Wisconsin.  In
 June 1970 approximately 50 percent of  the river bottom was covered with fibrous sludge
 to a depth which ranged from six Inches to several feet.   A mathematical model was
 developed to predict sludge distribution, and  It appeared  to depict actual river
 conditions quite well.   Approximately  U/5 of the lower Fox River is subject to sludge
 deposition, scour, and redistribution;  while the remaining 1/5 is either always free
 of sludge or contains permanent beds.   The principal  mechanism for sludge bed
 destruction is decomposition, since scour and  flotation merely relocate the sludge at
 another position In the river.  A linear  temperature  profile is found in the bed,
 indicating that the energy generated by the  decomposition  process is negligible In
 comparison to that conducted in from outside the bed.  Laboratory studies were conducted
 which demonstrated that anaerobic decomposition is the principal mechanism for the
 destruction of organic matter in a sludge bed.  Chemical pulps anaeroblcally decompose
 faster than do groundwood  pulps of similar surface-to-volume ratios by a factor of about
 •tvo.  The rate-limiting step tn the anaerobic  decomposition process is the breakdown
 of cellulose into glucose  and/or celloblose.   Temperature  has an appreciable effect on
 the rate of fibrous sludge anaerobic decomposition.   Appreciable differences in rate
 of decomposition occur at  different river locations and at different times of the year

-------
                                                                          1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-69U6 (Continued)
Card 2/2
in the same location.  The life of a fibrous sludge bed in the lower Fox River would
be one to two years if no new material were added to the bed.

INDEX TERMS:  Distribution, Biodegradation, Pulp wastes, Fox River.
AMIC-6991* (Continued)
Card 2/2
                     INDEX TERMS:  Aqueous solutions, Aromatic confounds, Chemical reactions, Chemical
                          analysis, Hydroxylatlon,  Sample preparation.
AMIC-6991*
"AROMATIC HYDROXYLATION  A3 AN  ANALYTICAL REACTION",  Albert,  K.  3. , University of
Wisconsin, Madison,  Wisconsin, Dissertation Abstracts  No.  72-31-511, 1972, 169 pp.
(Complete report  not available from AM1C.)

          The  Hamilton hydroxylating system consisting of  an aqueous solution of
ferric  ion,  catechol, and hydrogen peroxide, hydroxylates  aromatic compounds In
aqueous solution.  This  thesis reports the  further development and application of this
system  to the  quantitative determination of some aromatic  compounds.  By reducing the
Initial ratio  of  peroxide to aromatic to 2.0 or less,  stable absorbance values were
obtained, the  yield  depending  upon the ratio.  The Instability of the initial
hydroxylatlon  product has been overcome by  incorporating a 'stabilizer' in the
reaction mixture.  Two such modified Hamilton systems  which were studied extensively
are  those of cyclodextrin at 25 degrees and glucose  at 25  degrees and 75 degrees.
Using the cyclodextrin - modified Hamilton  system, many mono- and disubstituted       4
benzene derivatives  give linear absorbance-concentration responses In the range
0.0001-0.0008  M with apparent  molar absorptivlties between 1000 and 5000.  The
glucose-modified  Hamilton hydroxylatlng system has been suggested for the analysis of
aromatic compounds at 75 degrees.   Calibration curves  were linear In the range
0.0001-0.001 M of aromatic compound, and molar absorptivitles of 1000-5000 ware
observed.  The results establish that (a) hydroxylatlon Is a useful analytical process;
(b)  a model  enzyme system can  be exploited  for Its analytical utility; and (c) the
concept of developing analytical selectivity by means  of complex formation with
cyclodextrins  may be worth further exploitation.  As one of the few methods available
for  the phenyl group as  a functional group  for analytical  purposes, this technique
has  the advantages and limitations of a general functional group method.
                    AMIC-7063
                    "AM  IMMOBILIZED CHOLINESTERASE PRODUCT FOR USE IN THE RAPID DETECTION OF ENZYME
                    INHIBITORS IN AIR OR WATER", Goodson, L. H., Jacobs, W. B., Davis, A. W., Analytical
                    Biochemistry, Vol. 51, No. 2, February 1973, PP 362-367-
                              Cholinesterase has been Immobilized on the surface of open-pore urethane
                     foam in a two-step process  in which (1) Cholinesterase is adsorbed on aluminum
                     hydroxide gel during the preclpation of the aluminum hydroxide from a solution of
                     aluminum chlorohydroxlde, and (2) the aluminum hydroxide gel-enzyme precipitate is
                     suspended in a starch slurry and applied to urethane foam.  The resulting product Is
                     shown to retain  Its activity during monitoring of water for the presence of certain
                     organophosphate  and carbamate Insecticides.  Details are given for the preparation of
                     both the plain starch gel-Immobilized product and for the improved aluminum hydroxide
                     gel-starch  gel enzyme pads.  (See also AHIC-6922)

                     INDEX TERMS:  Monitoring, Water pollution, Insecticides, Pollutant identification, Air
                           pollution, Organophosphorus pesticides, Carbamate pesticides. Adsorption,
                           Stability, Methodology, Enzymatic Inhibitors, Cholinesterase, Enzyme activity,
                           Enzyme preparation.

-------
                                                                           1.   PHYSICAL AND  CHEMICAL METHODS,
AMIC-7132
"PRalMPOUNDMENT  3TUDY OF WEST POINT LAKE, GEORGIA",  Schneider,  H.  F.,  Hill,  D.  W.,
Weldon,  M,  R., Gentry, R. E., U.  3. Environmental Protection Agency,  Southeast  Water
Laboratory, Athens, Georgia,  Report No.  TS 03-71-208-001.2,  January 1972, 2OO pp.
NTIS  Report No.  PB 213 306.

          The  studies provided data on water temperature,  color,  turbidity,  specific
conductance, alkalinity, dissolved solids, pH,  DO, BOD,  total organic  carbon,
organic  1J,  total P, total Mn, Fe, total and fecal conforms, Salmonella, periphyton,
p.iytoplankton, and benthlc organisms.   It is concluded that: (1)  The  potential for
accelerated eutrophicatlon and its associated nuisance problems are increased greatly
by both  past and current municipal and industrial development in  the  West Point Lake
watershed.   (2)  Thermal stratification is expected to occur  following  Impoundment.
(3) Numerous isolations of Salmonella  serotypes from the study  area indicate that
several  areas are hazardous for primary contact recreation at the  present time. (U)
After closure of the dam, the increased residence time in  the lake will tend to dampen
vater quality variations.  (5)  Water quality should  improve  following  completion of
secondary biological treatment and chlorinatlon at Atlanta's R.M.  Clayton wastewater
treatment plant.

INDEX TERMS:  Water quality,  Enteric bacteria,  Salmonella, Benthlc fauna. Municipal
      wastes, Industrial wastes.  Heavy metals,  Diatoms,  Chlorophyta, Cyanophyta,
      Crustaceans,  Mollusks,  Stoneflles,  Mayflies, Stenonema rubrum, Chattahoochee
      River, West Point Lake, Macroinvertebrates, Preimpoundment  studies.
AHEC-7259
"USE OF X-RAY FLUORESCENCE TO DETERMINE TRACE METALS IN WATER RESOURCES",
Blasius, M. B., Kerkhoff, S. J., Wright, R. 3., Cothern, C. R., Water Resources
Bulletin, Vol. 8, No. U, August 1972, pp 70U-71U.
AMIC-7197
"DETERMINATION OF UR/tNlUM  IN URINE  SPECIMENS FOLLOWING THEIR SEPARATION THROUGH
ANION EXCHANGE"., Korkisch, J.,  Steffan,  I.,  Mikrochlmica Aota,  No.  2,  March 1973,
pp 273-278.

          A separation method  that  is generally applicable  for  uranium In the analysis
of urine specimens  Is described.  This is based on  the adsorption of the uranium on the
strongly basic anlon exchanger  Dowex  1,  X8 from human urine that  has been strongly
acidified with hydrochloric acid, whereby most  of the organic components, phosphoric
acid and most mineral urine components are removed.   Thus it becomes possible to
separate the uranium compounds  rapidly and simply without prior evaporation of the
urine and destruction of the organic  compounds. If need be, the  foreign ions that are
adsorbed along with the uranium,  such as iron and also adsorbed urine  coloring
materials, are removed through  subsequent washing of the resin  with a  mixture of 50
vol percent tetrahydrofurane, Uo  vol  percent methylglycol and 10  vol percent 6 N
hydrochloric acid,  and the uranium  is eluted with 1 N hydrochloric  acid.  The
determination of the uranium In the eluate can  then be conducted  without interference
by the fluorometrlc method.  (In German)

INDEX TERMS:  Urine, Separation techniques,  Ion exchange, Uranium.
          Samples for analysis by x-ray fluorescence were collected from the Great
Miami River near Dayton, Ohio in a closed container.  The container was pressurized to
about 30 lb/ sq in with a bicycle pump to force the water through filter paper to be
used in the analysis.  The arrangement for the x-ray fluorescence included a
bremsstrahlung source, a Si (Li) solid state detector, a 102k channel multichannel
analyzer and associated electronics.  The data were analyzed by a digital computer.
The most positive method for element identification was to run standard samples against
the suspected elements.  Known samples for quantitative calibration were made by
vacuum depositing the metals of Interest on aluminum foil.  The intensity of the peak
varied linearly with the thickness of the metal.  Ketals in particulate form were
separated on Watman No. 1*1 or Millipore filters; metals in ionic form were collected on
ion exchange filters.  For metals between Ti and Cs on the periodic table detection
limits were 30 ppb for particulate forms and Q.k ppm for ionic forms.   Ca, Ti, Cr, Fe,
Cu, La, Sr, and Cd vere found in the Great Miami River samples.

INDEX TERMS:  Sampling, X-ray fluorescence, Alkaline earth metals, Separation techniques,
      Heavy metals, Calcium, Chromium, Iron, Copper, /inc, Cadmium, Strontium, Titanium.
AMIC-7316
"SENSITIVITY AND DETECTABILITY LIMITS FOR ELEMENT ,4. nN.-U.YSIS BY PROTON-INDUCiD
X-RrtY FLUORESCENCE WITH A 3 MV VAN DE GRaAFT", Umbarger,  C.  J., Bearset,  R.  C.,
Close, D. A., Malanify, J. J., Report No. Conf-720801-2,  1972,  13 pp.  NTIS  Report No.
LA-DC-72-1069.

          Protons from a 3 MV Van de Graaff have been used to produce  characteristic
x-rays from 21 elements spanning the periodic table.   THE ELEMENTS ANALYSED  Ti,  V, Fe,
HI, Cu, Ge, Kb, Zr, Ag, Sn, Sb, Ce, 5m, Dy, Tm, W,  Au, Pb, Bi,  Th, and U.  Absolute
K alpha and L alpha x-ray production cross sections have  been determined,  allowing one
to calculate sensitivities for any given sample, detector geometry,  and proton beam
parameters.  Elemental detectability limits are discussed assuming various backings
and matrix materials.  The large number of available  small proton accelerators
throughout the United States promises wide applicability  of  this technique to
environmental and blomedlcal analysis.

INDEX TERMS:  Heavy metals. X-ray fluorescence. Sensitivity,  Detection limits.

-------
                                                                           1.  PHYSTrAT. AND rRFMTTAT
 "CHANGES IN PHYSICAL, CHEMICAL AND BIOLOGICAL PROPERTIES OP NATURAL WATERS AFTER
 CONSTRUCTION OF DAMS", Jankovic, M., Archives of Biological Sciences, Vol. 23, Noa. 1-2,
 1971, pp 1*9-56.                      	

           Limnologlcal studies of the river Batlava and of the Batlava reservoir In
 the first year of Its formation confirmed the hypothesis that physical and chemical
 factors and the biological composition of river blotopes undergo considerable changes
 in new reservoirs.  The chemical congposltion of the Batlava reservoir differed a great
 deal from that of the river.  The thermal and gas regimes changed first because the
 reservoir water with Its stagnation and overturn periods was subject to chemical and
 physical laws different from those of watercourses.  The ion content also changed.
 Compared to the river the reservoir had lower mineralization because the quantities of
 HC03 and Ca decreased considerably, the water in the reservoir thus becoming poor in
 calcium.  Mineral phosphorus also decreased considerably.  On the other hand in the
 reservoir water there was a considerable Increase of nitrate nitrogen end especially of
 dissolved organic matter.  This was due to the inflow of large quantities of surface
 water, bringing a great deal of mineral and organic matter, and to biochemical processes
 in the reservoir - primarily decomposition of submersed overground flora and the
' release of salts from the bottom.  As a result of basically changed ecological
 conditions new biocenoses developed.  Rheophlle species disappeared and were replaced
 by stagnant rheophile forma, pioneer species of the limnal benthic fauna.  Massive
 development of these forms created transitional biocenoses of mud-rheophile nature with
 Chironomus thlmai as the doninant.  They were later replaced by mud-inhabiting
 communities with Chironomus plumosus as the dominant.  The autochtonous fauna of the
 river gradually gave way to biocenoses more suited to the new environmental conditions.
 AMIC-7^91* (Continued)
Card 2/2
 INDEX TERMS:   Water quality, Impounded waters, Nutrients, Limiting factors, Benthic
       fauna.  Succession, Batlava Reservoir.
                    AMC-7502
                    "POTOMAC RIVER  WATER QUALITY NETWORK.  WATER YEAR 1972", Interstate Commission on
                    the Potomac  River  Basin, Washington, D.C., Report, Water Year 1972, 115 PP-

                               This  report  is the fifteenth in a series published annually by the
                    Interstate Commission  on the Potomac River Basin and contains summaries of data on
                    alkalinity,  BOD, chlorides, conforms, color, DO, nitrites, nitrates, KJeldahl
                    nitrogen,  pH, phosphates,  flow rates, temperature, total bacteria, solids, and
                    turbidity.  The data were  printed  from the STORET system.  (See also AMIC-3159)

                    INDEX TERMS:  Water quality, Potomac River, Nutrients, Alkalinity, Biochemical oxygen
                          demand, Chlorides, Coliforms, Enteric bacteria, Color, Dissolved oxygen, Nitrites,
                          Nitrates, Nitrogen,  Hydrogen ion concentration, Phosphates, Flow rates, Water
                          temperature,  Turbidity,  Suspended solids, Dissolved solids, KJeldahl nitrogen,
                          Antietam  Creek,  Shenandoah River, Rock Creek, Anacostla River, Oxon Run.
AMIC-7532
"ADSORPTION OF CHLORINATED HYDROCARBONS FROM SEAWATER BY A CROSSLINKED POLYMER",
Harvey, G. R., Woods Hole Oceanographic Institution,  Woods Hole, Massachusetts,
Report No. EPA-R2-73-177, March 1973, 26 pp.

          The objective of this study was to develop  a working analytical method for
adsorbing and recovering low concentrations of chlorinated hydrocarbons such as
pesticides and polychlorinated blphenyls from seawater using Amberllte XAD-2. It was
found that the resin required cleanup before use to eliminate contamination.  On the
basis of experiments, It is recommended that a column of 1/1.d. of 7 be used and flow
rate not exceed five bed volumes.  Using these parameters, Woods Hole seawater was
analyzed and the results compared with those from solvent extraction.  The results were
Identical, viz. 1* ppt DOT, 10 ppt dieldrin, and 30 ppt PCB.  The adsorbed compounds were
1OO percent recovered by elutlon with four bed volumes of acetonltrlle or ethanol.
One column was reused 15 times with no change in efficiency.  It is concluded that the
method developed is very efficient for monitoring seawater and should provide
detection to about one part per trillion.  XAD-2 was  not compressed when used in an
in situ column at 10OO m depth.  It is suggested that the resin be used to monitor
coastal areas by mounting columns for towing behind vessels.

INDEX TERMS:  Polychlorinated biphenyls, DDT, Dieldrin, Sea vater. Separation techniques,
      Adsorption, Elutlon, Ariberllte XAD-2, Detection limits.

-------
                                                                           1.   PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 AWC-7555
 "INSECTICIDE RESIDUES IN WATER AND SEDIMENT FKJM CISTERNS ON THE U.S. ADD BRITISH
 VIRGIN ISLANDS - 1970", Lenon, H., Curry, L., Miller, A., Patulskl, D., Pesticides
 Monitoring Journal, Vol. 6, No. 3, December 1972, PP 168-193.

           Samples of water and sediment vere collected from cisterns in four of the
 Virgin Islands during February and March, 1970, to be analysed for pesticides.  Water
 samples were collected in glass bottles, extracted by liquid-liquid partitioning with
i purified petroleum ether, partially evaporated, sealed In vials, and mailed to Michigan
 for analysis.  Before analysis sample3 vere dried with anhydrous sodium sulfate,
 partially evaporated and adjusted to 25 ml.  Sediment samples were collected with a
 plankton net and mailed in screw-capped bottles.  These were filtered, the filter
 containing the sediment dried and the sediment extracted with petroleum ether.
 Sediment extracts vere prepared the same as water extracts.  All samples were analyzed
 for DDE, DDD, DDT, dieldrin, and malathlon by electron capture gas chromatography.
 Evidence of an unknown malathlon metabolite was found In all Ug water samples analyzed,
 whereas malathlon was found In only two (0.01 and O.lU ppb).  DDT, its metabolites,
 and dieldrin were not commonly found in the vater samples except those from St. John
 where dieldrin was detected in approximately 30 percent of the samples (average
 concentratlon-0.19 ppb).  Sediment samples from cisterns, In general, contained much
 higher concentrations of pesticides than water, with DDT and Its metabolies occuring
 most frequently.  In many of these sediment samples, the residue levels were high
 enough to be of concern.  AS a result It Is strongly recommended that cisterns be
 cleaned frequently to remove sediment.

 INDEX TERMS:  Water analysis. Sediments, Cisterns, Gas chromatography, DDT, DDD, DDE,
       Dieldrin, Pesticide residues. Virgin Islands, Malathlon, Separation techniques.
 AMIC-7730
 "LO6J OF FERTILIZER NUTRIENTS FROM SOILS TO DR«INAGE WATERS.  PART I. STUDIES ON
 GRASSED WATERSHEDS IN WESTERN NORTH CAROLINA.  PART II. NITROGEN CONCENTRATIONS IN
 SHALLOW OROUNDWATER OF THE NORTH CAROLINA COA2TAL PLAIN", Kilmer, V. J., Gllliam,
 J» W., Joyce, R,  T.> Lutz, J. F., University of North Carolina, Water Resources
 Research Institute, Raleigh, North Carolina, Report No. 55, Contract No.
 14-31-0001-3233,  August 1972, 35 PP.  NTIS Report No. PB-213 98l.

           The loss of nitrogen and phosphorus to surface and subsurface drainage
 waters from two very similar watersheds with blue grass sod in Western North Carolina
 was measured for  three years.  Only one watershed vas fertilized the first two years
 and both were fertilized the third year.  The difference in the quantity of N leaving
 the two watersheds during the first two years was approslmately 1C kg/ha per year or
 10 percent of that applied.  Most of the nitrogen leaving the two watersheds was in
 the NO sub 3-N form with the greatest losses coming during the winter months.  The
 total N concentration in water leaving the two watersheds during the winter was 2-3
 ppm from the unfertilized watershed and 6-10 ppm from the fertilized watershed.  Very
 little P was lost from either watershed.  The NO sub 3 -N concentrations found in
 water samples from 10-foot wells located in the North Carolina Coastal Plain were 1
 ppm or less In wooded areas and generally in the range of 1-5 ppm under cultivated
 fields.   The highest concentrations were normally noted during the winter months.

 INDEX TERMS:   Drainage water, Agricultural watersheds, Nitrogen, Qroandvater, Phosphorus,
       Fertilizers,  Agricultural runoff, Discharge (water), Nutrient loss.
AM1C-7733
"PHOSPHORUS RELEASE FROM LAKE SEDIMENTS", Wildung, R. E., Schmidt, R. L., Battelle
Memorial Institute, Pacific Northwest Laboratories, Richland, Washington, Report No.
EPA-R3-73-02I*, Contract No. ll*-12-508, April 1973, 202 pp.

          Investigations were undertaken to characterize the major inorganic and
organic forms of phosphorus In sediments of Upper Klawath Lake, Oregon, determine the
potential for release of phosphorus from the sediment as influenced by water and
sediment composition and environmental parameters, and establish the relationship
between phosphorus release and algal growth.  Sediment characterization was extended
to other lake systems including Shagawa Lake in Minnesota, Agency and Diamond Lakes
In Oregon and Lake Erie.  Sediments of Upper KLamath Lake, although differing in their
ability to release phosphorus, exhibited seasonal changes in phosphorus concentration.
These changes were most pronounced In the inorganic phosphorus fraction and in a bay
which received agricultural runoff and initially contained relatively large quantities
of phosphorus in the sediment interstitial water.  Release of and resorptlon of
phosphorus associated with the solid phase occurred.  Release appeared to be largely
from nonoccluded iron forms of phosphorus whereas resorptlon was primarily in the
form of nonoccluded aluminum forms of phosphorus.  The rate and extent of phosphorus
release, described by regression models, vas related to sediment composition.
Release was accelerated by increased temperature and the presence of a phosphorus
sink such as an anion exchange resin In laboratory studies or actively reproducing
phytoplankton in field studies.  Algal growth response to phosphorus released from
sediments during dialysis was approximately equivalent to the response to
orthopho sphate.
AMIC-7733 (Continued)
Card 2/3
INDEX TERMS:  Eutrophlcation, Water quality, Lake sediments,  Lake Erie,  Environmental
      effects. Laboratory tests, Measurement, Soil properties,  Soil analysis, Model
      studies. Nutrient removal, Cycling nutrients, Upper KLamath Lake,  Shagawa Lake,
      Agency Lake, Diamond Lake, Characterization, Phosphorus release, Nutrient
      availability.

-------
                                                                          1-   PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-7735
"ANNOTATED BIBLIOGRAPHY OF- LAKE ONTARIO LIMNOLOGICAL AND RELATED  STUDIES.  VOL.
I  - CHEMISTRY",  Proto,  D., Sweeney,  R. A.,  State  University College at Buffalo,
Great Lakes Laboratory, Buffalo,  New York,  Report Mo. EPA-R3-73-028a, March  1973,
10l» pp.

          One  hundred eighty-seven (Ifi7)  papers concerning chemical aspects  of
Lake Ontario and influent tributaries were  reviewed and abstracted.  Each paper was
cross-indexed  by author, geographic  area  of lake  and/or tributary in which study was
performed, technique and instrumentation  and parameters.  In  addition, a list  of
addresses for  the authors and agencies was  included along with other possibly
pertinent references which the authors were not able to secure and review within the
time limitations of the grant. (See also AMIC-71*97)

IKDKX TERMS:   Limnology, Lake Ontario, Bibliographies, Abstracts, Instrumentation,
       Analytical techniques,  Documentation, Reviews, Chemical analysis,  Water  analysis,
       Chemical properties, Physical  properties, Water properties, Chemical limnology.
 AMIC-T738 (Continued)
Card 2/2
 Extensive data and results from the other studies are given.   One of the  main
 conclusions of the study was that many results are questionable because of the
 inadequacies of the analytical techniques.  Round robin tests were conducted in
 conjunction with several laboratories to demonstrate the variability in analytical
 data.

 INDEX TERMS:  Kinetics, Mercury, Absorption, Sediments, Freshwater fish,  Adsorption,
I       Bioassay, Methylmercury, Methylatlon, Bioaecmnulation.
AMIC-7738
"MECHANICS OF MERCURY TRANSFORMATION  IN BOTTOM SEDIMENTS", Krenkel,  P.  A.,
fieimers, R. B., Shin, E. B.,  Burrows,  W. D.,  McMullen,  E.,  Vanderbllt University,
Environmental and Water Resources  Engineering,  Nashville, Tennessee,  Technical
Report No. 29, Contract Ho. lU-17-0002-571, March 1973, 183 PP.

          The objectives of this investigation were:   (l) To determine the
mechanisms, rates, environmental requirements,  and possibilities for  inhibition of
transformation of mercury  into compounds such as methylmercury;  (2) To determine
whether soil type is a factor in transformation of mercury; and  (3) To determine the
detention time of mercury  and its  compounds in a lake or reservoir.   To fulfill the
objectives, extensive surveys and  analyses of the literature were conducted  regarding
sediment adsorption and desorption; mercury absorption, excretion, and distribution
in fish and other organisms;  and methylation  of mercury followed by laboratory and
field investigations on those topics.   The study on absorption and desorption
included observation of the sorption characteristics of clays, sands, and sediments
with varying pH; chlorides; mercury species,  compounds, and concentrations;  and
determination of the potential for inhibition of mercury methylation  in sediments.
Bioassays were conducted with bluegills and Hg-203 labeled  methylaercury to  study
the uptake and excretion of mercury compounds in fish.   Methylation (including
biomethylation) studies were  conducted in Jenkins tubes containing contaminated
sediments, fish, and or seed  organisms and investigated the effects of temperature,
Pig concentration, pH, chlorides, and BOD and  uptake of methylnercury  by the  fish.
Sediment samples were collected from Pickwick Reservoir and analysed  for organic
C and N, total Hg, solids, specific gravity,  acid insoluble residue,  volatile solids,
particle size, pH, and COD.   The results of the last study  were  not conclusive.
 AMIC-7739
 "WATER POLLUTION POTENTIAL OF MANUFACTURED PRODUCTS CATALOG  SECTIONS  I,  II, AND III",
 Berkowitz, J. B., Schimke, G. R.,  Valeri,  V.  R.,  U. S. Environmental  Protection Agency,
 Municipal Technology Branch,  Washington, D.C.,  Report Nos. EPA-R2-73-179b,c,d, April
 1973.

           This set of reports consists of  three volumes:   (l)  Summary, (2) Product
 Listing, and (3) Chemical Ingredient Listing.  Extensive  information  is  given on
 annual production rates, product lifetimes, toxicity oxygen  demand, solids, color, odor,
 eutrophlcation, oil and tars, hardness and chemical compositions of a wide range of
 manufactured products.

 INDEX TERMS:   Industrial wastes, Toxicity, Industrial production. Oxygen demand, Color,
       Odor, Eutrophicatlon, Dissolved solids, Suspended solids, Organic  acids, Phenols,
       Resins, Alcohols, Pesticides,  Dyes,  Detergents, Heavy  metals, Organic solvents,
       Stearates, Portland cement.  Clove oil,  Spearmint oil,  TNT.

-------
                                                                           1-  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHnns
 AMIC-7761                                    ~~~
 "MECHANISMS OF MERCURY TRANSFORMATION IN BOTTOM SEDIMENTS PROGRESS REPORT", Krenkel,
 P. A., Reiaers, R. S., Shin, E. 3., Burrows, Vanderbilt University, Environmental
 and Water Resources Engineering, Nashville, Tennessee, Technical Report No. 27,
 January 1972, 79 pp.

           n brief review is presented of the events that led to the interest
 in mercury methylation.  Problems with the analysis for methyl and total mercury
 are discussed and the Importance of the relationship between methyl and total mercury
 content in fish is demonstrated.  The major existing question with regards to mercury
 in the environment is its quantitative analysis.  Investigations concerned with the
 analysis of methylmercury are reviewed along with the status of methylmercury analysis
 at Vanderbilt University as a result of studies sponsored by the Sport Fishing
 Institute.  It is concluded that the reported values for both methyl and total mercury
 are subject to question and that standardized techniques for both analytical
| techniques are mandatory.  Experimental studies on the effects of various environmental
 factors on the methylation phenomenon are described and a successful technique for
j performing these studies Is elucidated.  Relationships between various forms of mercury
! and their adsorption in sediments are described and preliminary studies of the kinetics
 of mercury adsorption/desorption are presented.  Preliminary analysis of fish taken from
 Pickwick Reservoir for total and methylmercury are presented along with corresponding
 values of methylmercury.  It is concluded that, since the FDA standard for mercury in
 fish is based on methylmercury content, regulatory agencies should routinely analyze
 fish flesh for methylrasrcury and act accordingly, since It Is quite possible that the
 methylmercury content is below the 0.5 ppm limit utilized by FDA.
AMIC-7761 (Continued)
Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS:   absorption, Freshwater fish, Sediments, Analytical techniques, Gravimetric
      analysis,  Volumetric analysis, Polarographic analysis, Gas chrooatography,
      Colorl«etry,  Mass spectrometry. X-ray fluorescence, Neutron activation analysis,
      Sample preparation, Biological samples, Methylmercury, Transport, Preconcentratlon,
      Ion selective electrodes,  Emission spectroscopy, Atomic absorption spectrophoto-
      metry, Biomethylation,  Amperometric analysis, Catalytic analysis.
                     AKIC-7763
                     "POLLUTION AS A  RESULT OF FISH CULTURAL ACTIVITIES", Hinshaw, R. N., Utah State
                     Division of  Wildlife Resources,  Salt Lake City, Utah, Report No. EPA-R3-73-009,
                     February 1973, 209 PP.

                              This study was  undertaken to evaluate the effect of fish hatchery
                     activities on pollutant levels in streams.  A program of semi-monthly physical-chemical
                     analysis was conducted for  a year at six trout hatcheries.  These determinations were
                     taken at the hatchery infllnflow and outfall, the receiving water above and below the
                     hatchery outfall.  Bottom fauna  was sampled once a month during the summer and
                     bi-monthly through the winter  on selected stations in the receiving waters.  Flow data
                     was  recorded for the influent, effluent, and receiving waters.  There was no
                     correlation  between the pounds of food fed In the hatcheries and:  (1) changes of
                     chemical quality In the receiving waters or (2) changes in kinds and numbers of bottom
                     fauna organisms  in the receiving waters.  The analysis of samples revealed degradation
                     of the water quail-fey through every hatchery and in the receiving water.  This
                     degradation  was  beneficial  from  a fisheries standpoint but water quality and public
                     health considerations may require cleanup before acceptable levels could be achieved.

                     INDEX TERMS:  Fish hatcheries, Water quality, Benthlc fauna, Public health, Pathogenic
                           bacteria, Coliforms, Most probable number test, Macroinvertebrates.
AMIC-7771
"FLUORESCENT PROBES IN THE DETECTION OF INSECTICIDES IN WATER", Himel, C. M.,
University of Georgia, Department of Entomology, Athens. Georgia. Report No.
EPA-R2-73-217, April 1973, >*7 pp.

          Fluorescent probes are molecules whose spectral responses are changed by
their environment.  A fluorescent probe which is in equilibrium with the active
site of cholinesterase enzymes will have emission spectra and quantum yields
corresponding to (a) the free probe and (b) the probe-enzyme complex.  Insecticides
In water which compete for the active site will displace the probe from Its complex
and quench the fluorescence of the probe-enzyme complex.  The quenching effect will
be related to the concentration of the Insecticide and the equilibrium constant
and quantum yield of the probe-enzyme complex.  The change in spectral response
can be the basis of a new analytical methodology for insecticides.   The objectives
of the present research included synthesis of candidate fluorescent probe
molecules for cholinesterase enzymes and evaluation of the feasibility of
development of a new analytical method for insecticides in water.
Active-site-directed, equilibrium fluorescent probes have  been synthesized and
used in the development of the analytical system.   Results with Dursban,  Thiodan,
and certain other insecticides are In the range of 0.1 microM.   Insecticides
which do not compete with, or displace the probe from its  complex are not detected.
Experimental parameters for design and synthesis of optimum probe  molecules were
developed.

INDEX TERMS:   Insecticides,  Analytical techniques,  Water pollution,  Synthesis,  Pollutant
      Identification, Fluorescent probes,  Enzyme systems,  Cholinesterase,  Enzymatic
      Inhibitors.

-------
                                                                           1.   PHVSTr.AT. AK-n rnFMTrftT
AMIC-7778
"PYflDGRAPHIC GHOSo CHARACTERISATION OF WATER CONTAMINANTS", LysyJ, I., Newton, P. R.,
North American Rockwell Corporation, Rocketdyne Division, Canoga Park, California
iteport No. KPA-R2-73-227, Contract No. lU-12-802, May 1973, <)k pp.

           A hydrochemical instrument and methodology were developed for direct analysis
of organic materials in aqueous solutions based on thermal fragmentation followed by gas
chromatographic separation and detection of the resulting derivative compositions.  The
applications of the developed technique to water pollution surveillance, optimization of
•waste treatment processes, and characterization of natural waters were studied.  It was
found that a recorded pattern of pyrolytically produced fragments for a given water
sample reflects the total nature of its organic composition, and can be interpreted and
differentiated in a number of ways.  Using a priori established calibration patterns for
individual components to be found in a mixture, the pattern produced by a mixture can be
analyzed mathematically.  The system can be calibrated and the data can be interpreted
in terms of pure organic compounds, classes of organic materials, or any other
arbitrarily defined organic mixtures such as those found in industrial waste effluents.
Application of this technique to pollution surveillance is based on the fact that each
industry has a waste whose chemical composition is distinctive to its operation.   The
uniqueness of such waste compositions offers a means for their characterization as
separate entities, rather than as a collection of various chemical species.  The  validity
of this postulate  was experimentally demonstrated.  With this method, both the identity
of the  source and  the quantity of the waste contributed by each source could be
determined.
AMIC-7778 (Continued)
                                                                       Card 2/2
INDEX TERMS:  Haste Identification,  Water pollution sources, Methodology,  Industrial
      wastes, Effluents, Water analysis, Monitoring, Organic compounds,  Instrumentation,
      Characterization, Pyrographic  analysis, Surveillance, Chemical  composition, Data
      interpretation, Thermal fragmentation.
 AMIC-7855
 "THE QUALITY OF COASTAL WATERS:   FIRST ANNUAL PROGRESS  REPORT", Lau, L. S.,
 University of Hawaii,  Water Resources Research Center,  Honolulu, Hawaii,
 Technical Iteport No.  60, Sea Grant. Program No. UNIHI-3EA GRAMT-72-01, September
 1972, 213 PP.  NTI3 Report No. COM 73 101W*.

           This project attempted to evaluate  water quality  in  terms of  stress  or  well
 being of aquatic communities, using the traditional chemical,  biological, and  bacterial
 parameters of water quality only to identify  the  factors and their concentrations which
 are of ecological significance.   In turn the  ecological findings are utilised  to  refine
 the standards and criteria applicable to traditional parameters.  Kahana Bay was
 selected as a coastal  water under the Influence of relatively  undeveloped land.   Data
 already available on the physiography and hydrology of  its  drainage area, its  estuarine
 and oceanographlc aspects,  and the nature and movement  of Its  sediments were
 supplemented by a program of analysis of water and sediments and its biota.  DDT  and
 PCB (pesticides)  in Kahana Bay waters and sediments appeared at levels which seem to be
 ubiquitous in nature.   Heavy metals,  particularly  Pb, Cd, Zn,  and Cu appeared  in  the
 sediments in no identifiable pattern  and apparently depend  on  the parent geologic
 formations from which  the  sediments are  derived.   Sugarcane production and milling
 wastes were studied on Kauai.  Observations of mill  waste discharge and coastal water,
 sediments,  and biota were made both before and after the 90-year old Kilauea Sugar
 Company closed down its operations in north Kauai.   Untreated mill wastes were found to
 be  the  major  contributor of wastes from  the industry, carrying conforms, sediments,
 trash and bagasse.  The effect was largely an  extensive visible plume and debris  in the
 waters.   Sediments, rather  than  water, harbored most of the nutrients, heavy metals, and
 pesticides  In the  ocean.  A striking  improvement in  the aesthetic aspects of the  coastal
AMIC-7855 (Continued)
                                                                      Card 2/2
water quickly followed the cessation of mill waste discharges.  Fish and other aquatic
biota reappeared rapidly after the cessation of mill operations.  The effects of urban
wastewater, especially sewage, were studied during the report period largely by
cooperating with agencies In Hawaii engaged In major investigations and projects such
as sewage treatment at Sand Island, Pearl Harbor, Kaneohe Bay, and Mokapu Point.  In
less extensive situations at Sandy Beach, Qaiklki, Maunalua Bay, and Manoa Stream, the
Project is amassing data for the effects on the coastal environment of surface runoff
and general human activities in urbanized areas.

INDEX TERMS:   Water quality, Water pollution effects.  Industrial wastes.  Municipal wastes.
      Sediments, Polychlorinated biphenyls, Heavy metals, Coliforms,  Irrigation water,
      Marine  fish, Algae, Nutrients,  Pesticides, Sugarcane mills,  Macroinvertebrates.

-------
                                                                           i.   PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 "MERCURY DISTRIBUTION IK ESTUARIHE-BEARSHORE ENVIRONMENT", Wisdom, H. L., Journal of
 the Waterways, Jiarbors and Coastal Engineering Division, Proceedings of the American
 Society of Civil'"Engineers, Vol. 99, No. WV2, May 1973, 257-265 pp7
           Samples of estuarine and nearshore waters were collected in the area of the
 southeastern United .States between Cape Romain, South Carolina and Jacksonville, Florida
 for mercury analysis by the reduction aeration flameless atomic absorption technique.
 Samples of Jpartina alternlflora were taken from 2 areas of different salinity; sediment
 cores were also taken from those areas and from adjacent channels for comparison.
 Plankton samples were from surface waters nearshore and offshore of the northeast and
 southeast U. S. coast.  All mercury samples were analyzed as the vater samples.  It vas
 found that the transfer of mercury through an estuarine system of the Southeastern
 Atlantic Coast to the open ocean is controlled by: (1) mixing of estuarine waters with
 offshore waters; (2) loss in plant detritus due to rafting offshore; (3) migration of
 estuarine organisms to offsn.ore areas.  Hn additional loss of mercury from the estuarine
 system is due to sedimentation.  A budget of mercury for estuaries along the Georgia
 Coast indicates that the dominant salt marsh plant, Spartina altemiflora, exerts a
 strong control on the migration of this metal.  Mercury enters -the estuary primarily in
 solution, delivering approximately 1.5 mg annually to each square meter of salt marsh.
 The annual uptake of mercury by the plant is approximately 0.7 mg/sq m of salt marsh.

 INDOC TERMS:  Estuarine environment. Mercury, Path of pollutants, Estuaries, Rivers,
       Bottom sediments, Plant tissues, Plankton, Water pollution, Kearshore vaters.
AMIC-791Q
"STEAM STRIPPING ODOROUS SUBSTrtNCES FROM KRAFT EFFLUENT STREAMS", Hrutflord, B. F.,
Johanson, L.  K., McCarthy, J.  L., University of Washington, Seattle, Washington,
Report No. SPA-R2-73-196, April 1973, 89 pp.

           Laboratory and design studies have been completed relating to volatile
constituents  which appear in Kraft black liquor and condensate streams, and how these
can best be removed and recovered.  In order of decreasing concentration, the volatile
constituents  are alcohols, terpenes, ketones, sulfur bearing compounds, and phenolic
compounds. Methanol, the major alcohol contaminant, Is found in from 280 to 6*400 ppm
In condensate streams,  amounting to 11 to 16 pounds per ton of pulp produced.
Terpenes are  found to range from a few ppra to about U500 ppm in condensates, k to 9
pounds per ton of pulp,   ncetone is present at concentrations of 2 to 200 ppm,
corresponding to 0.07 to O.^t pounds per ton of pulp.  In all, some Uo compounds were
found  to be present in condensate streams.  The feasibility of combining steam
stripping of  Kraft liquor with steam stripping of condensates was explored, and the
conditions under which this may be warranted are reported.  Under most present mill
situations, steam stripping of black liquor and the last stages of evaporator
condensates does not  appear to be warranted except in unusual cases.  Exploratory
type studies  were made and are reported concerning improved methods of predicting
vapor-liquid  equilibria  In such systems, and separation of the resulting volatile
oils.

INDEX TERMS:   Pulp wastes,  Effluent streams, Separation techniques, Waste identification,
      Organic compounds,  Odor-producing pollutants, Steam stripping, Kraft mill
       condensates,  Pollutant removal,  Chemical recovery.
AMIC-7912
"PHOSPHATE IN INTERSTITIAL WATERS OF ANOXIC SEDIMENTS;  OXIDATION EFFECTS DURING
SAMPLING PROCEDURE", Bray, J. T., Bricker, 0. P., Troup, B.  H., Science,  Vol.  ISO,
No. 1*093, June 1973, pp 1362-135J*.

          Ten sediment samples were collected with a Benthos gravity corer from
Chesapeake Bay to investigate the effect of sampling procedures on the  analysis of
phosphate in interstitial water.  Samples were homogenized in plastic bags and loaded
into two gas-operated nylon squeezers.  Sampling and analytical procedures were carried
out in nitrogen for the first of each duplicate pair and in  air for the second after
the second squeezer had been exposed to the atmosphere for 1J minutes to  simulate
normal procedures.  Colorimetrlc analysis showed that each sample exposed to  air
contained lower concentrations of soluble reactive phosphate than unexposed samples.
Additional experiments were conducted in the laboratory in which samples  were  exposed
to air or prepared under nitrogen, and standard and deaerated filters were used in  the
squeezers.  Phosphate and iron (II) were determined on alternate 3-ml and 1-ml
portions.  The results demonstrate the importance of protecting against oxidation for
the analysis of phosphate In interstitial waters rich in iron (II).  It Is concluded
that either the iron (II) oxidizes to Iron (ITT) which precipitates Inorganic
phosphate as iron phosphate or the iron precipitates as the  hydroxide which scavenges
the phosphate by sorption.  Using procedures developed to prevent oxidation,  samples of
interstitial water taken from depths to 100 cm in Chesapeake Bay were analyzed.  The
results for the upper 1 m of sediments show a general Increase in phosphate downstream
to about mid-bay.  The possible significance of the observed phosphate  concentrations,
which average 3DOO times that of the bay water, is that catastrophic overturn  of the
top 20 cm of sediment could release large amounts of phosphate to the overlying vater.
AMT.C-7912 (Continued)
Card 3/2
INDEX TERMS:  Connate vater, Phosphates,  Sampling,  Oxidation,  Iron, Chesapeake  Bay,
      Errors, Sample preparation.

-------
                                                                               PHYSICAL AMD CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMIC-7917
 "CHEMISTRY AND TROPHIC STATUS OP SEVEN NEW ZEALAND LAKES", McColl, R. H. S. , New
 Zealand Journal of Marine and Freshwater Research, Vol. 6, Ho. kf December 1972,
 PP 399-^7.

           The chemistry of the surface and bottom waters of seven Rotorua lakes
 (Okatatna, Rotoma, Tlkitapu, Okareka, Hotokakahl, Ngapourl, and Okaro) was examined
 monthly betveen April 1970 and April 1971 in relation to the biology of the lakes.
 Twenty-four parameters were measured, Including dissolved oxygen, major ions, silica,
 phosphorus, nitrogen, algal pigments, and some trace elements.  All lakes were warn
1 monomictlc, second-class lakes.  The waters were soft and variations between lakes In
i composition of major cations and anlons appeared to be related to catchment
 differences.  The major cations and Cl ion varied little with season.  Sulfate varied
 seasonally in the hypolimnla of the most productive lakes (Okaro, Ngapourl, and
| Rotokakahi).  Jillca vas abundant in all lakes, except Tikltapu vhere diatoms were
] poorly represented.  Depletion of silica by diatom populations was only observed in
 the two most productive lakes (Okaro and Ngapouri).  All lakes except Ngapouri
I showed anomalous silica distribution with lower concentrations in the bottom waters at
 all times.  Copper and zinc varied little between lakes and depths, but showed marked
 peaks during winter circulation.  Data acquired from the analyses were used to
 classify the lakes by trophic level.  Algal growth was most vigorous during winter
 circulation and In some lakes a related phosphate 'depletion phase1 occurred,  nitrate
 concentrations were low by world standards, except in the most productive lakes during
 winter circulation.  Nitrite occurred irregularly in the surface waters of some lakes
 and in trace amounts in the hypolimnla of all lakes in late summer.
 AMIC-7917 (Continued)
Card 3/2
 IHDEX TERMJ:  Trophic level, Heavy metals. Water quality, Nutrients, Chemical analysis,
       Limnology, New Zealand.
                    AMIC-7919
                    "DDT IN SOME NEW ZEALAND MARINE AND FRESHWATER FAUNA", Solly, 3. R. B., Harrison,
                    D. L., New Zealand Journal of Marine and Freshwater Research, Vol. 6, No. k,
                    December 1972, pp 456-62.

                              Ten species of fish, crustaceans, and raollusks, taken from inland and
                    coastal waters of New Zealand In  1969-70, mostly before the legislative ban on DDT,
                    were analyzed for residues of lindane, polyehlorinated biphenyls (PCB), and DDT and
                    its metabolites.  Samples were macerated, extracted, and analyzed by gas
                    chromatography.  The detection limit was 0.01 ppm and recoveries were 62 perecent for
                    DDE, 78 percent for ODD, 78 percent for DDT, 78 percent for lindane, and 95 percent
                    for PCB.  DDE was the only organochlorine compound detected in six species, and DDE
                    was the major residue in all others.  ODD and/or DDT was present only in eels
                    (Anguilla australis sehmidtil, A. diefenbachll), groper (Polyprion oxygeneois), and
                    some flounder (Rhombosolea plebeiaj^No lindane or PCB was found in any of the
                    samples.  The range of total DDT  levels in edible flesh was 0-0.20 parts per million
                    (on a fresh tissue basis) and the mean residue level for all specimens was 0.02 ppm.
                    The incidence of residues appeared to be related to the regional use of DDT.

                    INDEX TERMS:  DDT, ODD, DDE, Polychlorinated biphenyls, Gas chromatography, Freshwater
                          fish. Marine fish. Crayfish, Mussels, Oysters, Sample preparation. Biological
                          samples, Lindane, Detection limits, Nev Zealand.
AMIC-7923
"OPTICAL PROPERTIES AND COLOR OF LAKE TAHOE AND CRATER LAKE",  omith, R.  C.,  Tyler,  J.  E.,
Goldman, C. R., Limnology and Oceanography, Vol. 18, No.  2,  March 1973,  pp 1B9-199.

          Spectral irradiance has been measured as a function  of depth in Crater Lake,
Oregon and Lake Tahoe, California.  In Lake Tahoe, Secchi disk observations  and submarine
photometer measuremente have been recorded year round since  July 1967 and beam
transmlttance has been measured as a function of depth.  From  these data the radiant
energy input and certain optical properties of the two lakes are presented.   Since  color
Is a principal esthetic feature of these lakes, a complete color analysis is also
presented.  This information provides an objective standard  with which to compare
possible future changes in the optical properties and in  the esthetic appearance of
Crater Lake and Lake Tahoe.  The method can be applied generally to quantify the optical
deterioration of any aquatic hibltat and can detect such  deterioration before it is
noticeable by casual visual observation.

INDEX TERMS:  Optical properties, Color, Depth, Light penetration,  Solar radiation,
      Lake Tahoe, Crater Lake.

-------
                                                                          1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-7927
"TRACE ELEMENT TRAPPING  IN PTEROPOD TESTS", Turekian, K.  K.,  Katz,  A., Chan, L.,
Limnology  and Oceanography,  Vol.  18,  No.  2, March 1973, pp 2UO-2U9.

           Pteropod tests from the Gulf of Aqaba and the South Atlantic Ocean and
 'bulk1 (soft tissue) plankton samples from Long Island Sound  were analyzed by
 instrumental neutron activation analysis  (INAA) for 11 trace  metals (Fe,  Ce, La,  3m,  Eu,
Th,  Sc,  Cr, Co,  Sb, je)  to  study the  trapping and transport mechanisms for these  metals
 in the oceans and the  capability of pteropods to modify the composition of seawater
during this process.   The Internal correlations among these metals strongly suggest that
a finely particulate (less  than 0.2 micron) authigenic iron-rich phase (hydrated  oxide  or
phosphate) is trapped  by both the soft and hard tissues of plankton and that this phase
 is the major carrier of  several of the trace  metals.  Assuming that the iron-rich
 floe-trapping mechanian  is  applicable to  all  pelagic calcareous tests, then the downward
flux of  iron and associated trace elements carried by these tests can be  assessed.  To
the  precision of our knowledge about  the  transport and dissolution of calcium  carbonate
 in deep  water, this assumption leads  to the conclusion that the iron and  the associated
trace elements have residence times in the deep water of  the  same order of magnitude  as
that of  the deep water itself.  (Reprinted from Limnology and Oceanography, Vol.  IB,
No.  2, March 1973, PP  2UO-2U9.  Copyright 1973 by the American Society of Limnology and
Oceanography Inc.  Reprinted by permission of the copyright owner.)

INDEX TERMS:  Trace elements, Absorption, Plankton, Transport depletion.  Gastropods,
      Sea  water, Heavy metals, Path of pollutants, Instrumental neutron activation
      analysis,  Pteropods,  Shells,  Rare earth elements, Fate  of pollutants, Detection
      limits, Sample preparation.
AMIC-7926
"THORIUM IN  WATER  AND ALGAE  FROM THE ADRIATIC  SEA",  Strohal, P., Pinter, T.,
Llmonology and Oceanography, Vol. Ifl, No.  2, March 1973,  PP 250-253.
           Samples of seawater and algae collected along the coast of the Rovlnjl region
in the North  Adriatic were  analyzed for the presence of thorium by neutron activation
analysis  (NAA).   Thorium was preconcentrated by copreclpitation vith Fe(OH)3,  which
was precipitated  by  the  addition of FeC13 solution and NaOH to either filtered or
unfiltered seawater.   The samples were stirred well and Th separated from solution
using Buchner vacuum filters or a centrifuge.  The precipitate was dissolved in HC1,
Fe removed by organic extraction, water phase evaporated, dried, irradiated and
analyzed  by MAA.   Pa-233 radioactivities were measured in all samples and compared to
standards.  Samples  of algae were measured, carefully separated, identified, and
washed with seawater to  remove impurities.  The samples were slowly dried at 110 C,
ignited at  ^50 C,  reduced to constant weight, and analyzed by NAA as were the  seawater
saaples.   In  filtered seawater, values were 0.8 pg Th/1 and lower; for unfiltered
seawater  samples,  values about three orders of magnitude higher were obtained.
Thorium concentrations In marine algae are in the range of 1 to 0.01 microgram Th/g
ashed material.

INDEX TEFMS:  Sea water,  Chemical analysis. Marine algae, Neutron activation analysis.
      Heavy metals, Chlorophyta, Phaeophyta, Rhodophyta, Radiocnemlcal analysis, Thorium,
      Adriatic Sea, Hare  earth elements, Preconcentration, Pa-233, Sample preparation.
AMIC-7930
"THE CHARACTERIZATION OF SOLUBLE PHOSPHORUS RELEASED BY LIMNETIC ZOOPLANKPON",
Peters, R., Lean, D., Limnology and Oceanography, Vol. ifl, No.  2, March 1973,
pp 270-279.

          Three rapid techniques were used to characterize the  main forms of soluble
phosphate released by Daphnia rosea.  Uniformly F-32-labeled laboratory animals were
transferred to nonradioactlve water and most of the soluble radlophosphorus was
shown to be similar to POU in anion exchange, in gel filtration chromatography, and
in a kinetic analysis of Incorporation by natural seston.  In addition, Dlaptomus
mlnutus was labeled In situ with P-32 and Its release products  compared to POU by gel
filtration.  This analysis and those using Daphnia indicated that the released
soluble phosphorus was about 90 percent orthophosphate.  However, molybdate analyses
of the souble phosphates released in a ID-hr experiment showed  them to be only 60
percent orthophosphate.  Net reuptake of orthophosphate was insufficient to account
for this discrepancy.  Recycling of phosphorus is postulated In longer experiments,
which leads to a substantial underestimate of the orthophosphate release.  (Reprinted
from Limnology and Oceanography, Vol. Ifl, No. 2.  March 1973, pp 270-279.  Copyright
1973 by the American Society of Limnology and Oceanography, Inc.  Reprinted by
permission of the copyright owner.)

INDEX TERMS:  Phosphorus, Zooplankton, Pollutant identification, Radlochemical analysis,
      Phosphates, Waterfleas, Copepods, Radioactivity techniques, Characterization,
      Orthopho sphate a.
AMIC-79^3
"TOTAL MERCURY ANALYSIS:   REVIEW AND CRITIQUE",  Relmers,  H.  3.,  Burrows,  W.  D.,
Krenkel, P. A., Journal Water Pollution Control  Federation,  Vol.  1+5, No.  5,  May
1973, PP 81U-828:

          With the recent concern about mercury  as an environmental hazard came
numerous reviews and a large amount of research  concerning new methods of mercury
analysis.  The history and an extensive literature review of mercury analysis are
presented, as well as a critique of the different methods.   Conclusions are  presented
as to the best method In terms of convenience, cost,  simplicity,  and sensitivity.  At
present, wet oxidation with potassium permanganate and potassium  persulfate  followed
by chemical reduction and analysis of the  elemental mercury  by flameless  atomic
absorption spectroscopy Is the most convenient method for  determining total  mercury.
Economically, the best method remains the  classical colorimetrlc  dlthizone technique.
Atomic absorption Instrumentation, because of its economy, simplicity, and sensitivity,
is the most useful method for mercury analysis.

INDEX TERMS:  Analytical  techniques.  Reviews, Mercury, Documentation, Methodology,
      Evaluation, Heavy metals, Aqueous solutions,  Inorganic compounds, Organomercury
      compounds. Biological samples.  Environmental  samples.  Sample preparation. Chemical
      interference. Natural waters.
                                                                                        11

-------
                                                                           1.   PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMIC-79U6
 "NITROGEN RELEASE FROM LAKE SEDIMENTS", Austin, E. R., Lee, G. F., Journal Mater
 Pollution Control Federation, Vol. 1+5, No. 5, May 1973, pp 870-879.
           * study was made or the release of nitrogen compounds from two Wisconsin
 lakes sediments that were completely mixed vlth the water at all times.  Eknan dredge
 sediment samples were taken from the shallow (5 m) and deep (22 m) areas of Lake Mendota,
 and the deeper areas (27-32 m) of Lake Trout.  Under aerobic conditions, over 1+9 percent
 of the total nitrogen present In one sample was released as soluble organic nitrogen,
 aranonia, and nitrate In approximately 200 days.  Under anaerobic conditions, these
 sediments released about 6 percent of the nitrogen in a similar period of time.
 Sediments from the second lake released 5 and 2 percent, respectively, of the potentially
 released nitrogen in 100 days under aerobic and anaerobic conditions.  Similar tests
 conducted on unstirred sediments showed that the amount of mixing was probably one of the
 controllingactors of nitrogen release.

 INDEX TS8MJ:  Lake sediments, Nitrogen, Nitrogen compounds, Anaerobic conditions,
       Aerobic conditions, Mixing, Shallow water, Deep water, Laboratory tests, Lake
       Mendota, Lake Trout, Nitrogen release, Chemical composition.
 "LITHIUM SILICATE SEDIMENTATION TRACER FOR SHOAL DEPOSIT STUDIES", Nedved, T. K.,
 Fochtman, £. G., Langdon, W. M., Sullivan, F. 0., Journal Water Pollution Control
 Federation, Vol. 1+5, No. 5, May 1973, PP 896-901*.
           Investigations were conducted on a 12-mile section of the Calumet River to
 determine the relationships between the ss discharges by outfalls and the buildup of
 shoals in a waterway.  Shoal soundings were used to determine the long-term overall rate
 of shoal buildup, as well as the volume and distribution of the shoal material in a
 selected study area.  The data indicated an average rate of shoal buildup of 0.19 ft/
 month.  The shoals were sampled extensively to determine the physical and chemical
 properties of the deposited materials.  The wet density of the shoals In the area
 averaged 87 Ib/cu ft.  The sa concentration of the river in the immediate vicinity of
 the study outfall indicated rapid dispersion of the materials discharged.  These surveys
 further demonstrated the extreme complexities of the processes Involved in shoal buildups
 in this particular area.  Techniques were developed for quantitative tracing of the
 contribution of a particular discharge to the formation of shoals.  Lithium
metasilicate was used as the tracer material.  A proton-capture technique was used to
assay  for the lithium.  Special pan type sedimentation samplers were designed,
 constructed, and used in a field demonstration study.  This investigation indicated that
the suspended matter discharged by the study outfall traveled considerably In both the
upstream and downstream directions.  Although only 30 percent of the tracer material was
recovered,  this study amply demonstrated that lithium metasilicate could be used
 iuccessfully as a sedimentation tracer.

INDEX TERMS:   Tracers, Shoals,  Sedimentation, Suspended solids, Distribution patterns,
      Tracking techniques,  Lithium silicate,  Calumet River.	
AMIC-7950
"3PBCTROPHOTOMETRIC DETERMINATION OF AMMONIA", Zadorojny, C., Saxton, S., Finger, R.,
Journal Water Pollution Control Federation, Vol. 1+5, No. 5, May 1973, pp  905-912.
          An Improved indophenol blue method was investigated for the determination
of ammonia in fresh, estuarlne, marine, and wastewaters.  Absorbance curves were
prepared by adding known amounts of ammonium-nitrogen to ammonia-free water and to Puget
Sound seawater.  Wastewaters were diluted, spiked, and analysed to determine
reproduclbility of the method.  Analyses were conducted to study the effects of 20
inorganic electrolytes, urea, or araino acids.  No major interferences occurred with
these substances or as a result of variations in salinity.  The range of amaonla
determination was as follows:  with intenslfier, 0.001 to 1.0 mg/1 ammonia nitrogen;
without Intensifler, 1 to 51 mg/1 amnonla nitrogen.  It is concluded that the method is
simple and veil suited for routine use.

INDEX TERMS:  Amnonla, Water analysis, Sea water, Estuaries, Colorinetry, Spectre
      photometry. Salinity, Waste water (pollution), Ureas, Amino acids, Fresh water,
      Chemical interference, Detection limits, Indophenol blue method, Sample
      preparation, Reproduclbility, Chemical recovery.
AMIC-7955
"DITHIZONE PROCEDURE FOR MERCURY ANALYSIS-, Elly, C.  T., Journal  Water Pollution Control
Federation, Vol 1+5, No. 5, May 1973, pp 9"+0-9l*5.
          The dithlzone procedure for mercury in receiving water  and effluents is a
fairly sensitive, direct method for the spectrophotometric determination  of mlcrogram
quanities of mercury (ll) in sulfuric acid solution.   Temperature is not  critical between
20 degrees and 28 degrees C, but strict control of pH is necessary to eliminate metal
interference.  The advantages of the method are Its low relative  standard deviation and
relative error, low cost, and simplicity of reagents  and equipment.   Disadvantages
Include free chlorine interference, possible copper (I)  and iron  (III)  interference,  too
many variables affecting sensitivity, questionable ability to measure all mercury forms
without digestion, and inability to detect less than  2 mlcrograms/1 of mercury (II).

INDEX TERMS:  Separation techniques, Mercury,  Water analysis. Waste  water (pollution),
      Dithlzone method, Chemical interference, Detection limits.
                                                                                        12

-------
                                                                           1.   PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-79&6
"STEAM DISTILLATION:   A  SIMPLE TECHNIQUE TOR RECOVERY 07 PETROLEUM HYDROCARBONS FROM
TAINTED FISH",  Ackman, R.  G-., Noble, D., Journal of the Fisheries Research Board of
Canada, Vol.  30,  No.  5,  May 1973, pp Tll-Tl1*^

           Fish caught In the Athabaska River were filleted vhen required, blended
with distilled vater  and transferred to a distillation flask along with flask washings.
Antibumping granules  were  added and the fish muscle blend was simmered for 30 min before
distillation to reduce foaming.  Neohexane was added to the condensate in a centrifuge
tube and shaken vigorously.  The neohexane layer which was allowed to seperate upon
standing for 1 hr or  less was analyzed by flame ionization chromatography using a
support-coated open-tubular (SCOT) stainless steel column.  Samples of diesel oil and
fish obtained from a  source apparently free from contamination wsre examined as controls.
Simple steam distillation was found to be efficacious for isolation of hydrocarbons from
contaminated whitefish.   Gas-liquid chromatography on support-coated open-tubular
Apiezon-I. columns demonstated that hydrocarbons recovered from the tainted fish had a
composition pattern qualitatively similar In detail to that from a sample of diesel oil
suspected as the source  of contamination.

INDEX TERMS:   Fish, Reparation techniques, Methodology, Pollutant identification, Steam
       distillation. Recovery, Petroleum hydrocarbons, Sample preparation, Muscle.
AMIC-7970
"REMOVAL OF MERCURY FROM AQUEOUS SOLUTIONS BY NITROGEN-CONTAINING CHEMICALLY MODIFIED
COTTON", Roberts, E. J., Rowland, S. P., Environmental Science and Technology. Vol. 7,
No. 6, June 1973, PP 553-555.

          Four chemically modified cotton celluloses vere investigated for
effectiveness In sorting mercury Hg(2 plus) from aqueous solutions.  The mortified
cottons were generally used in the chopped form.  Each was suspended In 500 ml of
aqueous solution containing the Hg salt and shaken for 16 hr at room temperature.  The
modified cotton was then removed from the solution by filtration and the filtrate was
analyzed by flameless AAS.  The cross-linked polyethylenimine (CPEI) cotton containing
adsorbed Hg was collected on a sintered glass filter and air-dried.  The filtrate was
analyzed for Hg; portions of the cotton were washed in sodium citrate, EDTA, and sodium
thlocyanate and In each case the wash solution was analyzed for Hg.  Effectiveness of
these conpositions was due to amine units of the following types:  ethylenimine network
polymer formed in the fibers, polyethylenimine sorbed on the filters, 2-diethylamlnoethyl
substituents in the cellulose, and 2-amlnoethyl substltuents in the cellulose.  Cotton
cellulose modified with 2-diethylamlnoethyl or 2-amlnoethyl substltuents were the more
effective conpositions at concentrations of mercury above 1000 ppb.  Cotton cellulose
containing ethylenlmine network polymer was most effective on the basis of the weight of
the celluloslc composition.  Sorbed mercury can be readily removed from the chemically
modified cottons for recovery of the former and reuse of the latter.

INDEX TERMS:  Mercury, Aqueous solutions, Adsorption, Separation techniques, Pollutant
      removal, Cotton celluloses, Jtecovery.
AMIC-7969
"DETERMINATION OF rtLKYLBEKiiiNESULFONArE (AB3) ID BOTTOM SEDIMENT", Ambe, Y.,
Environmental Science and Techonology, Vol. 7, No. 6, June 1973, pp 51*2-51+5.
           A new method for the analysis of alkylbenzenesulfonate (ABS) in bottom
sediments of a polluted river, a lake, and the sea was examined and the availability of
the method was verified.   Methylene blue active substance (MBAS) was extracted from
dried mud sample with methanol benzene (1:1) mixture.  After the solvent was completely
evaporated, the residue was dissolved into distilled water and the concentration of MBAS
was determined from the ratio of peak heights at viavenumber 1010/cm and at 890/on of the
infrared  spectrum of MB-MBAS complex.  Multiplying the value of MBAS by ABS/MBAS, the net
content of ABS In the sediment was determined.  Applying this method for the studies of
polluted  lake  sediment and marine sediment, some geochemically interesting information
on the process and rate of recent sedimentation In the lake and sea vas obtained.

INDEX TERMS:   Alkylbenaene sulfonates, Bottom sediments, Lakes,0ceans, Colorlmetry,
      Methodology,  Pollutant ldentiflcatlon,Chemlcal analysis, Rivers, Infrared
      spectrophotometry, Methylene blue active substance, Saaple preparation. Chemical
      recovery.
AMIC-7973
"DETERMINATION OF LEAD IN PETROLEUM ADDITIVES USING ATOMIC .iBjORPTl ON
SPECTROPHOTOMETRY", Supp, G. R., Glbbs, I., Jusale, M., Htomlc Absorption Newsletter,
Vol. 12, No. 3, May-June 1973, PP 66-67.

          Petroleum samples were analyzed for lead compounds by dissolving samples
and stardards directly In M1BK and analyzing by atomic absorption.   This procedure
eliminated separations and acid breakdown followed by titration or precipitation
reactions.  Results of analysis by AA and wet chemistry agreed within experimental
error when samples containing lead cyclohexanebutyrate, lead diamyldlthlocarbamate,
lead naphthenate, or lead dlnonyljiaphthalene sulfonate were  analyzed.

INDEX TERMS:  Oil, Lead, Atomic absorption spectrophotometry, Sample preparation.
                                                                                        13

-------
                                                                           1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMIC-7971*
 "AH IMPROVED nA MlCRO^AMPLINtt SY3TEM", Fernandez, F. J., Atomic Absorption
 Newsletter, Vol. 12, No. 3, May-June 1973, pp 68-70.

           The Perkin-Elmer AA Microsampling System has been redesigned to improve
 performance, mechanical stability, and ease of operation.  The changes include a new
 mounting system which attaches directly to the burner mount base, a slide mechanism
 having a smoother and shorter action, a heat shield usable with both the Delves Cup and
 Campling Boat systems, plus a new mounting system for the Sampling Boat which
 permits rapid boat installation and interchange.  Blood samples analyzed for lead show
 that the reproduclbillty of results is very good using the new system.

 INDEX TERMo:  Laboratory equipment, Lead, atomic absorption spectrophotometers,
       fteproducibility, Microsampling system, Blood.
 AMC-7976
 "AH IMPROVED METHOD TOR DETERMINING ORGANIC3 BY ACTIVATED CARBON ADSORPTION AMD
 SOLVENT EXTRACTION - PT. II (TEST METHOD)", Buelow, R. W., Carswell, J. K., Syraons, J.
 M., Journal American Water Works Association, Vol. 65, No. 3, March 1973, pp 195-199.

           The complete test procedure is presented for determining organlcs In water
 in  the dissolved form by activated carbon adsorption and solvent extraction.  Organic
 materials adsorbed on a sample of activated carbon are removed by sequential extraction
 with two organic solvents.  The extracts are processed by volume reduction through
 distillation and drying.  The quantities of organic materials are then determined
 gravimetrically.  This method is primarily for monitoring the general organic content
 of  water and is  not designed as a collector of organlcs for further identification,
although,  with certain precautions, the resulting extracts can be reprocessed.  This
method does  not  require expensive instrumentation and divides the organics into 2
general  classes  - chloroform soluble and alchol soluble.  A special sampler (miniature
 JAM sampler) must be  used in order to obtain a representative sample for this method.
 see also  AMIC-6U53)

 [NDEX TERMS:  Solvent extractions, Adsorption, Pollutant identification. Activated
      carbon, Water pollution,  Organic wastes, Organic compounds, Laboratory tests.
      Water analysis,  Dissolved organic matter.
 AMic-7978                    '                         ~~~
 "THE MONITORING OF ORGANIC MATTER WITH POLYURETHANE  FOAM", Gesser, H. D., Sparling,
 A.  B.,  Chow,  A., Turner,  C. W.,  Journal Water Pollution Control Federation. Vol. 65.
 No. 3,  March  1973, pp 220-221.   '	~	

           Standard carbon adsorption apparatuses  with the carbon replaced by
 previously cleaned and extracted polyurethane foam plugs were  Installed  at the municipal
 water treatment plant at  Morris, Manitoba,  to determine the feasibility  of the test
 method  and the efficiency of the water treatment  process.  Water from the Red River which
 enters  the plant Is treated by  the carbon-alum-chlorine method.  The foam plugs were
 extracted  with Lexane, concentrated in a flash evaporator, made up to a  standard volume,
 and analyzed  by electron  capture gas chromatography.   The results obtained showed that
 the treatment process did not reduce the organic  contaminant level to any significant
 extent. The  use of polyurethane foam plugs is a  promising alternate to  the carbon
 adsorption method for the determination of  trace  organic contaminants in water.

 INDEX TERMS:   Organic matter, Monitoring, Water analysis, Water pollution, Pollutant iden
      identification, Orgamlc compounds, Methodology,  Polyurethane foam, Trace levels.
AMIC-7981                                                                             ~
"STREAM-VELOCITY EFFECTS OH THE HEAVY-METAL CONCENTRATIONS", Williams, L. G., Joyce,
J. C., Monk, J. T., Jr., Journal American Water Works Association. Vol. 65, No. 1*.
April 1973, PP 275-379.  	—~	

          Water samples were collected twice weekly in two 90-liter polyethylene Jugs
from the Black Warrior River and three of Its tributaries from February 17 to October
6, 1971.  One sample was flocculated by the addition of aluminum ammonium sulfate to
remove suspended matter; suspended matter from the other was concentrated by siphoning
the sample through a 60 millimicron screen and settling.   Samples were digested and
analyzed for Cd, Cr, Cu, Hg, Mn, Zn, and Fe by atomic absorption spectrophotometry.
River flow rates were also monitored.  No correlation was found to exist between
streamflow and the soluble concentrations of the selected heavy metals.  However, a
strong positive correlation did exist between the concentration of these metals and the
resuspended bottom sediments, mostly in the form of ooze  deposits, present in the water
column following Increased flow and scour from heavy rain runoff.   Copper, Iron,
manganese, mercury, and zinc concentrations were associated  with ooae  sediments that
accumulated during periods of low or negligible streamf low and  were resuspended Into the
water column following scours in a complex that was destructive to favorable  balance of
river biota and produced slugs of water unfit for good domestic supply.   Suspended
particles larger than 60 millimicrons that were screened  from the  water samples were
mostly organic and held the highest concentrations of  the  selected metals,  whereas
inorganic large particles had relatively  low carrying  power.

IMDKX TKftMS:   Heavy metala, Suspended sollda, Toxicity, Biological connunities.  Cadmium,
      Atomic  absorption spectrophotometry, Transport,  Chromium, Copper, Mercury,
      Manganese, Zinc,  Iron,  Runoff,  Scour.

-------
                                                                           !••   PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMIC-7983
 "CHARACTERISATION OF CHEMICAL SLUDGES", Calkins, R. J., Novak, J. T., Journal Anerlcan
 Water Works Association. Vol. 65, No 6, June 1973, pp
           n study was conducted to determine or evaluate the characteristics of
 sludges generated from the Missouri River.  The sludges collected from several treatment
 plants -were characterized by their settled-solids concentration, filtering rate which
 includes the parameter 'specific resistance', and cake solids.  The solids concentrations
 in the settled sludges were fould to vary to some extent with the type of coagulant used,
 the turbidity of the water, and, in the case of mixed sludges (softening-coagulant), the
 variations in the lime dose.  In evaluating sludge characteristics generated from a
 combined softening and coagulation process, the authors found that the concentration of
 magnesium may greatly Influence the results obtained.  Comparisons of sludge solids from
 processes where no lime was added indicate that sludges generated from turbid vaters can
 be expected to attain much higher settled-solids concentration than sludges from
 relatively clean vaters.  A relationship between cake solids and settled solids was found
 to exist for all sludges In this study.  No simple relationship was found to exist for
 specific resistances of the various sludges.  Several trends can be seen from the data,
 however.  In general, combined softening-coagulant sludges filter much more readily than
 do pure coagulants.  The presence or absence of magnesium seemed to have no influence on
 filtering characteristics of mixed sludges.  Changes in the sludge characterization
 parameters occurred vith time, primarily for the iron and alum residues.  None of the
 charges was dramatic, but all Indicate that sludge initally discharged from a treatment
 plant is somewhat different from sludge that Is stored or lagooned.

 INDEX TERMS:   Sewage sludge, Haste identification, Characterization, Chemical sludges,
 	Sludge treatment, Pollutant identification, Missouri River, Settleable solids.	
 AMIC-7990
 "IN3TRUMENT.AL AND NUMERICAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR ON-LINE INTERPRETATION OF HIGH
 RESOLUTION MASS SP3CTRAL DATA", Kilmer, R. M., Taylor, J. W., Analytical Chemistry,
 Vol.  U5, No. 7, June 1973, PP 1031-101*5.

           Several important instrumental charcteristics of an AEI-MS9 double focusing
 mass  spectrometer in the Nler-Johnson configuration are discussed which influence the
 choice  of techniques for on-line data acquisition and numerical methodology for high
 resolution mass spectral data processing.  The approach described yields an average error
 of  less than 10 ppm In mass measurement, and peaks as small as 0.05 percent of the
 tallest peak are observed.  Instrument vibration raises the average mass error.  Values
 below 3 ppm are obtained from data where vibration isolation has been attempted.  The
 time  of execution of the data reduction is about 3-10 min on the Raytheon 706 computer,
 and about 15-60 sec per spectrum on the Unlvac 1108.  The computing times depend on the
 number  of raultiplet peaks to be deconvoluted, the number of peaks in the spectrum, and
 the number of atoms allowed In the elemental formulas.  (Reprinted from Analytical
 hemistry,  Vol.  1*5,  No.  7, June 1973, PP 1031-10l»5-  Copyright 1973 by the American
Chemical Society.   Reprinted by permission of the copyright owner.)
INDEX TERMS:  Data processing. Computer programs, Mass spectrometry, Pollutant
      identification, Mass  spectra.
                                                                                        15
AMIC-7991                                         ~~
"POLYAROMATIC HYDRCCARBOHS IN HIGH-BOILING PETROLEUM DISTILLATES]  ISOLATION BY GEL
PERMEATION CHROMATOGRAPHY AND IDENTIFICATION BY FLUORESCENCE SPSCTRCMETRY", McKay, J. K.,
Latham, D. R., Analytical Chemistry, Vol. 1*5, No. 7, June 1973, pp 1050-1055.

          The identification of seven polyaromattc ring systems in petroleum is
reported.  The ring systems are 1.12,£.3-dlbenzoperylene;  1,12-o-phenyleneperylene,
pvreno-(1.3:lo'.2')pyrene; 2.3,10.11-dibenzoperylene; l,2,l*,5-dibenzopyrene,
benzo(e)pyrene, and benzo(g)chrysene.  These polyaromatlc hydrocarbons were Isolated by
a separation scheme involving ion exchange chromatography, gel permeation chromatog-
raphy, and thin-layer chromatography and were identified by fluorescence spectroscopy.
Gel permeation chromatography separated pericondensed aromatic ring systems from
catacondensed ring systems and the other components of an acid concentrate.  (Reprinted
fr(m Analytical Chemistry. Vol. 1*5, No. 7, June 1973, pp 1050-1055.  Copyright 1973 by
the American Chemical Society.  Reprinted by permission of the copyright owner.)

INDEX TERMS:  Separation techniques, Polyaromatlc hydrocarbons, Gel permeation chroma-
      tography, Ion exchange chroraatography, Thin layer chromatography, Fluorescence
      spectroscopy.
AMIC-7992
"OPTIMUM PROCEDURE FDR THE DETERMINATION OF SELENIUM IN BIOLOGICAL 3P3CIM2NS USING
Se-77m NEUTRON ACTIVATION", Blotcky, A.  J., Arsenault,  L.  J.,  Rack,  E.  P.,  Analytical
Chemistry, Vol. 1*5, No. 7, June 1973, PP 1056-1060.                         	
          An optimum procedure is outlined for the  rapid quantitative determination
of trace (greater than or equal to 0.06 microgram)  selenium In  serum and tissue using
Se-77m neutron activation.  Sample preparation,  Irradiation procedures, types  of
detector assemblies, and spectral analyses and data reduction are discussed.   The
optimum procedure utilizing a low-power nuclear reactor  consisted of irradiating
lyophillized tissue samples or dialyzed-lyophillized serum  samples for 20 sec, with a
20-sec decay time prior to radloassay.   The most suitable radioassay assembly  was the
5-nm X 3-in Nal (Tl) detector system.   Spectral  analyses and data reduction consisted
of eliminating the interferences of isotopes  of  relatively  long half-lives by  spectrum
subtraction and correction.  Comparisons between the  results obtained by the discussed
Se-77m procedure and values quoted for  an  NBS Bovine  Liver  Standard were excellent.

INDEX TERMS:   Neutron activation analysis,  Data  processing. Tissue, Blood, Selenium.

-------
                                                                           1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMIC-6009
 "APPLICATIOM OF LIQUID CHROMATOGRAPHY. TO POLLUTION ABATEMENT STUDIES OF MUNITION WASTES",
 Walsh, J. T., Chalk, R. C., Merrltt, C., Jr., Analytical Chemistry, Vol. 1*5, No. 7,
 June 1973, pp 1215-1220.                      ~	

           3ince wuste waters from TOT manufacture contain nitrobodies which are toxic
 (2.5 ppm toxic to fish), explosive, and colored, they consltitute a serious pollution
 hazard.  The application of liquid chromatography to pollution abatement studies of
 TNT waste waters is described.  These studies Include the characterization by liquid
 chromatography of the color formation occurring in TNT water, the development of a
 single, direct analysis for alpha-TNT and a description of how liquid chromatography
 was used to evaluate pollution abatement processes for the removal of nitrobodies from
 munition waste waters.  The abatement processes investigated were the column adsorption
 type, which required absorption isotherm, breakthrough capacity, saturation capacity,
I and column regeneration efficiency data.  The acquisition of these data by liquid
| chromatographic means is described.  The results showed that an adsorbent resin of the
 styrene-divlnylbenzene copolymer type possessed nitrobody adsorption efficiences at least
j equal to those of activated carbon and had the important added advantages of easy
I chemical regeneration and a significantly long life cycle.

 INDEX TERM3:  Waste water (pollution), Water analysis, Adsorption, Resins, Industrial
       wastes, Pollution abatement, Separation techniques, Color, Activated carbon, Fish,
       Toxlclty, TNT, Liquid cnromatography.
 AMIC-8016
 "CH3LQMSTRIC TITR>tTION5 OF McTAL CATIONS USING THE TUNGSTEN BRONZE ELECTRODE"
 Wechter, M. A., Harm, f, B., Ebert, G. M., Montoya, P. R., Voigt, A. F.,
 Analytical Chemistry. Vol. 1*5, No. 7, June 1973, pp 1267-1269.
           Tungsten bronze electrodes were used with saturated calomel electrodes In the
potentionetric titratlon of solutions of AI(III), Zn(Il), Cu(ll), Fe(lll), Ca(Il),
and  Mg(II).   Solutions were prepared by dissolving Al, Zn, and Cu in HN03 and
diluting and by dissolving salts of the remaining elements.  Solutions were buffered
with NH3/NHl*Cl or NHi*N03 and titrated with EOT*.  There vas excellent agreement
between calculated and observed values.  Oxygen In the solutions did not Interfere
in the  titrations.   It is concluded that in order to perform a successful netal ion
titratlon, only one of the following criteria need be met:  the metal Ion be
tltrable  In  basic solution either directly or Indirectly, the Ion be easily
reducible directly at the electrode surface, or a metal redox couple be present
which undergoes a change In concentration ratio at the end point.

IHDEX TERMS:   Volumetric analysis, Aluminum, Zinc, Copper, Iron, Calcium, Magnesium,
      Tungsten bronze  electrodes, Ion selective electrodes.
 AMIC-8017
 "IRON  SPECTRAL  IHTEHFERENCE  IN THE DETERMINATION OF ZIHC BY ATOMIC ABSORPTION
 SPECTROMETRY",  Analytical Chemistry, Vol. 1*5, No. 7, June  1973, pp 127!*-1275.

          Aqueous solutions  were prepared for atomic absorption spectrometry by
 dissolving  iron sponge  In HC1, drying,  and  dissolving  In distilled water.  These
 solutions were  used to  demonstrate that iron solutions, completely free of zinc,
 absorbed at the zinc resonance line.   Iron  was extracted from samples of the solution
 for  analysis of zinc.   Absorption curves showed that the determination of low levels
 of zinc  in  ferrous materials may lead to erroneously high  results unless steps are
 taken  to remove Iron from the samples prior to analysis.   Solutions which contain
 between  0.2 to  2.0 percent iron will be erroneously high by 16 and 13 micrograms/g
 Zn,  respectively.   It Is  suggested that existing analyses  of zinc on ferrous
 materials should be approached with caution.
 INDEX TERMS:  Zinc, Aqueous  solutions, Chemical interference,
      spectrophotometry.
itomic  absorption
AMIC-801B
"APPLICATION OF A SULFATE-SENSITIVE ELECTRODE TO NATURAL WATERS", Jasinski, R.,
Trachtenberg, I., Analytical Chemistry, Vol. 1*5, No. 7, June 1973, pp 1277-1279.

          Iron-doped chalcogenlde glass electrodes were used to investigate potential
interferences during analysis of sulfate ions in natural waters of high sulfate
content.  The method was based on barium sulfate precipitation.  Test solutions were
prepared in which Ca, K, and Mg were added as Interfering Ions.  Samples of waste
water, brackish water, and sea water were also analyzed.   A Ag/AgCl electrode was
used as reference in the analyses.  The resulting difficulties  introduced by the ions
considered were essentially the same as in all barium sulfate methods.   Sodium Ion
and chloride Ion at a hundredfold excess caused no problems.  Potassium Ion
interfered at this concentration level via coprecipitationj  91*  percent  recovery waa
obtained for 0.02 M sulfate Ion In 0.1 M KC1.  Magnesium and calcium distort the end
point because of simultaneous complexation with sulfate ion;  this does  not cause a
major problem with the titratlon technique.  Although calcium also coprecipitates,
this effect is sufficiently reproducible to allow for correction if the Ca content is
known.  At high sulfate concentrations the sample can be  diluted to minimize
interference.

INDEX TERMS:   Sulfates, Sea water,  Waste Water (pollution). Brackish water,  Potassium,
      Chlorides,  Magnesium,  Ion selective  electrodes.  Chemical  inteference.
                                                                                        16

-------
                                                                           1.   PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMIC-8020
 "PREDICTION OF K SUB sp FROM R SUB f VALUES.  CHROMATOGRAPHY OF U8 M5TAL IONS OH
 STAJOJIC ARSENATE AND PLAIN PAPERS IN BUTANOL-NITRIC ACID MEDIA", Quereshi, M., Sharma,
 S. D., Analytical Chemistry, Vol. U5, No. 7, June 1973, PP 1283-1288.

          The chromatography of W3 metal Ions was systematically studied in
 butanol-HN03 systems on plain and ion exchange papers.  Solutions were prepared of
 K, Kb, CB, Cu, Ca, Pd, Zn, Mn, Co, Ni, Hg, Cd, Ba, Sr, Be, Mg, Pb, U02, FelU(lI),
 VO, Sm, Pr, Bd, Fe(lII), In, Ga, La, Y, Al, Cr, Ce(lII), Bl, Sb, Au, Ru, Ir, Th,
 Hf, Tl, Ce(IV), Cb, Mo, w, pt, Ag, and Tl and spotted on the papers.  Separations
 are given on the basis of R sub f values.  In addition, the K sub sp of the arsenates of
 K, Kb, Cs, Tl, Y, La, Ga, and Ce were predicted on the basis of the H sub f values.

 INDEX TERMS:  Metals, Separation techniques, Ion exchange, Paper chromatography.
AMIC-8021
 "DETERMINATION OF NITRCGEN-15 BY CHEMICAL IONI2ATION MAES SPECTROMETRY", Lundeen, C. V.,
Vlscoml,  A.  S., Field,  F. H., Analytical Chemistry, Vol. 1*5, No. 7, June 1973,
pp 1288-1290.

          A technique Is presented for determining H-15 using isobutane chemical
lonlzatlon mass spectrometry.  The method Is based on the fact that ammonia is easily
protonated by  the tert-butyl ion in isobutane chemical lonization mass spectrometry to
produce the  NHk (plus)  ion,  but water is not protonated to produce the H30 (plus) Ion.
Consequently,  the relative amounts of N-15 and N-lk in ammonia containing both of these
isotopes  are obtained from the intensities of the m/e 18 and 19 ions produced where
ammonia is Introducted  into the mass spectrometer.  The ammonia to be measured Is
produced  from  the original nitrogenous material by acid digestion and is absorbed on
solid stearlc  acid.   The stearic acid is placed in the solids introduction proe and
heated to release the ammonia.

INDEX TERMS:   Mass spectrometry, Sample preparation, H-15.
                                                                                        17
 AMIC-8022
 "DETERMINATION OF TRACES OF THALLIUM IN URINE BY ANODIC STRIPPING AC VOLTAMMETRY",
 Levlt, D. I., Analytical Chemistry. Vol. U5,  No. 7,  June 1973,  pp 1291-1292.

          The purpose of this work was to apply the ac anodic stripping voltarametry
 technique with the hanging mercury drop electrode (HMDE) in a body fluid urine in order
 to determine, rapidly and directly, traces of thallium by measuring the current peak
 which results from the fundamental harmonic as stripping voltamnogram  record.   The
 behavior of thallium was examined, and the presence of interferences such as lead,  dis-
 solved oxygen, organic compounds, and other complication that effect the electrode
 process by adsorption were minimized under the selected conditions of  experimentation.
 The senstivity of the method vas improved by  a low background current  and was
 reproducible within 2.5 percent for 0.05 ppm thallium in urine.   The Tl (I) wave had a
 symmetrical shape, and its ac peak was a linear function of the concentration  in the
 mlcromolar range without interference from overlapping waves.  Pre-treatment by  dilution,
 cell exchange, use of complexing agents, degaslficatlon,  and foaming were not  required.

 INDEX TERMS:   Urine,  Thallium,  Chemical interference,  Anodic stripping voltamnetry.
 AMIC-8030
 "GAS CHROMATOGRAPHIC DETERMINATION OF RESIDUES OF METHYLCARBAMATE INSECTICIDES IN CROPS
 AS THEIR 2,I*-DI»ITHOPHENYL ETHER DERIVATIVES", Holden, E. R., Journal of the Association
 of Official Analytical Chemists. Vol. 56, No. 3, May 1973, pp 713.717.
         A general procedure was developed for determining methylcarbamates in plant
materials.  The pesticides investigated were Aminocarb, Bay 32651, Bay 78537, Bux,
Carbanolate, Carbaryl, Carbofuran, Ciba C-96U3, Decarbofuran, Hercules 5727, Hercules
9007, Landrin, Mesurol, Mexacarbate, Mobam, Promecarb, and Propoxur.  The residue was
extracted from crop material with acetonltrlle, and the extractive purified by
partitioning with petroleum ether and coagulating with phosphoric acid-ammonium clorlde
solution.  Phenolic Impurities were largely eliminated by partitioning a methylene
chloride extract with 0.1 N potassium hydroxide.   Carbamate residues were then treated
with l-fluoro-2,l*-dlnitrobenzene to form the ether derivative without a prior hydrolysis
step.  Efficiency in the conversion of the phenolic moieties to the phenyl ethers vas
essentially 100 percent, thus providing for good  reproducibility.   Residues were
determined at levels as low as 0.05 ppm.   Recoveries generally ranged between 90 and 110
percent.

INDEX TERMS:   Separation techniques, Gas  chromatogrphy, Plant  tissues, Sample  preparation
      Detection limits,  Methylcarbamate pesticides, Amlaocarb, Bay  32651, Bay  78537,
      Bux, Carbanolate,  Carbaryl, Carbofuran, Ciba C-96U3, Decarbofuran, Hercules
      5727, Hercules 9007, Landrin, Meeurol, Mexacarbate, Mobam, Promecarb, Propoxur.

-------
                                                                          1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMIC-8032
 "COMPARATIVE EXTRACTION OF CHLORINATED HYDROCAHBOH INSECTICIDES FROM SOILS 20 YEABS
 AFTER TREATMSNT", Hash, R. G., Harris, W. C., Ensor, P. D., Vfoolson, E. A., Journal
 of the Association of Official Analytical Chemists. Vol. 56, No. 3, May 1973, PP 728-732,

          Three methods, stake, Soxhlet, and column, were compared for efficiency of
 extraction of certain chlorinated hydrocarbon Insecticides from a Congaree sandy loam
 soil which had been treated 20 years earlier.  Column extraction had a tendency to be
 less efficient than the other 2 methods, but statistically there were no differences in
 extraction efflclences among the 3 methods for aldrln, dieldrin, heptachlor, chlordane,
 Isodrinj endrln, toxaphene, or Dllan and their residue products.  However, shake
 extraction was significantly more efficient for the BHC Iscmers than Soxhlet extraction
 and the latter was significantly more efficient than column extraction.

 INDEX TERMS:  Soil analysis, Pesticide residues, Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides,
       Aldrin, Dieldrin, Endrin,  Heptachlor, DDT, Shake extraction,  Soxhlet extraction,
       Column extraction,  Isodrin, Chlordane, Toxaphene,  BHC,  Delan, Heptachlor epoxide,
       Monachlor,  Lindane.
 AMIC-8031*
 "AN ISOLATION AND CLEANUP PROCEDURE FOR LOW LEVELS OF ORCANOCHLORINE PESTICIDE
 RESIDUES IN FATS AND OILS", Porter, M. L., Burke, J. A., Journal of the Association
 of Official Analytical Chemists, Vol. ?6, No. 3, May 1973, PP 733-73».
          An isolation and cleanup Is described for low levels of orginochlorine
 residues (about 0.005 ppm) In fats and oils, prior to electron capture gas-liquid
 cnronatography.  Com oil, butterfat, cod liver oil, chicken fat, and several
 dietary composites were used In the analyses for lindane, DDE, TDE, DDT, Mlrex,
 heptachlor epoxide, endosulfan I and II, dieldrin, endosulfan sulfate, and Aroclor
 125U.   The fat or oil was distributed on a column of unactlvated Florisll and the
 residues partitioned Into an eluant of 10 percent water in acetonltrlle.  Florisll
 column  chromatography with an elutlon solvent system comprised of mixtures of
methylene choride,  acetonltrlle, and hexane was used for the final cleanup.  Extracts
prepared In this manner were sufficiently free of fatty extractives to permit
 Injection of the equivalent of 50-60 mg fat sample for GUC.  The procedure should be
especially useful in determination of low levels of organochlorine pesticide
residues  in the fat of certain dietary composites.

INDEX TERMS:  Oil,  Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides, Llpids, DIE, DDD, DDT, Dieldrln,
      Aroclors,  Separation techniques. Pesticide residues, Polychlorinated biphenyls,
      Cleanup,  Lindane,  Mlrex,  Heptachlor epoxide, Endosulfan I, Endosulfan II,
      Endosulfan sulfate,  Aroclor 1251*.
 "MERCURY CONTAMINATION OF FISH IN NORTHWESTERN ONTARIO", FUnreite, N., Reynolds, L. M.,
 Journal of Wildlife Management.  Vol.  37,  No.  1,  January 1973, PP 62-68.

          Fish to be analyzed for mercury were gill-netted  from 18 lakes  and rivers
 in Northern Ontario, some of which were upstream and downstream from  a chlorine
 plant which had leaked about 3,000 Vbs of mercury annul]ly from 1962-1970.   Samples
 consisted of 186 specimens of walleye, northern pike,  lake trout, burbot, rock  bass,
 and white sucker.  Mercury content was determined In lateral musculature by wet
 digestion of the samples followed by cold vapor atomic absorption spectrophotometry.
 The maximum mercury levels in northern pike,  burbot,  and walleye were 27.8,  2U.8,  and
 19.6 ppm respectively, measured in specimens  taken 50-60 miles downstream from  the
 plant.  They decreased proportionally to the  distance from the plant  but were
 clearly elevated even 200 miles downstream.   The level* In specimens  from suspected
 uncontamlnated lakes were generally below 1 ppm but frequently above  the 0.2 ppm
 often considered as the maximum background concentrations.  The  latter finding may
 possibly be explained on the basis of the  ollgotrophic conditions characteristic for
 these lakes.

 INDEX TERMS:   Mercury,  Freshwater fish, Water pollution effects. Industrial wastes,
       Water pollution sources,  Rock bass, Walleye,  Lake trout. Chlorine plants.
       Atomic absorption.
AMIC-8CA5
"A M5THOD FOR THE DETECTION OF TRACES OF NITROSAMINES USING COMBINED GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY
AND MASS SPECTROM3TRY", Gough, T. A., Webb, K. S., Journal of Chromatography.  Vol.  79,
Hay 16, 1973, PP 57-63.                            	

         A gas chromatograph and high-resolution mass spectrometer,  coupled via a
membrane separator, were used for the analysis of samples of water and fods for traces
of nltrosamineo.  The nltrosamines studied were dimethyl,  dlethyl, dlpropyl, dlbutyl,
plperidyl, and pyrrolidyl.  The nltrosamines were detected by parent Ion monitoring with
a detection limit of 11 mg/1 on injected material.   The  gas chromatograph incorporates
a pressure-programming and peak-cutting device which is  described  in detail.   Overall
analysis time is substantially shorter than for isothermal or temperature-programmed
runs.

INDEX TERMS:   Water analysis. Foods,  GC-Mass spectrometry, Nitrosamines.
                                                                                        IS

-------
                                                                           1.   PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMIC-80U6
 "CHROMATOGRAPHIC SEPARATION OF FHEBOLS USING AN ACRYLIC FESIN", Fritz, J. S.,
 Willis, R. B., Journal of Chromtography. Vol. 79, May 16, 1973, pp 107-119.

          A liquid chromatograph Is described that uses gas pressure on water to
 force eluents through the coition.  A macroporous polyacrylate resin, Amberlyst XAD-7,
 was used In conjunction with methanol-vater or basic aqueous eluents for separation
 of mixtures of phenols.  The elutlon characteristics of twenty-one phenols are
 described.  These Included bromophenols, chlorophenols, cresols, and methylphenols.
 Several separations of actual mixtures are shown to demonstrate the separation
 capabilities of this system.

 INDEX TERMS:  Separation techniques, Phenols, Resins, Aqueous solutions, Amberlyst
       XAD-7, Liquid chroraatography, Chlorophenol, Methylphenol, Bromophenol.
 AMIC-8051
 "SEPARATION OF MANGANESE, IRON, COBALT, NICKEL, COPPER, ZINC AND CADMIUM BY
 REVERSED-PHASE CHROMATOGRAPHY USING TRI-N-OCmAMINE AS TOE STATIONARY PHASE AMD
 APPLYING A GRADIENT ELUTION TECHNIQUE", Neef, B., Grosse-Ruyken, H., Journaj^of
 Chromtography. Vol. 79, May 16, 1973, PP 275-285.
          A procedure ie described for the separation of manganese. Iron, cobalt,
nickel,  copper,  zinc and cadmium by means of reversed-phase chromatography.  The
distribution coefficients of these elements were determined by extraction with
trl-n-octylamlne-benzene (1:1) solution from hydrochloric acid and hydrochloric
acid-nitric acid mixtures.   In addition, the influence of particle size, degree of
loading  of silica gel with trl-n-octylamine, flow-rate and temperature on the height of
effective theoretical plate was investigated.  A gradient apparatus which was developed
for this kind of separation Is described; by Insertion of circuitous tubes between the
mixing vessels and the column head,  a concentration gradient can be obtained for the
eluent that is partly constant and partly decreased.

INDEX OERMS:  Manganese,  Iron,  Cobalt,  Nickel,  Copper, Zinc, Cadmium, Separation
      techniques,  Heavy metals,  Reversed phase chromatography. Distribution coefficients,
      Chromatograms.
 AMIC-8053
 "A NEW CHROMOGENIC REAGENT FOB THE DETECTION OF PHENOLIC COMPOUNDS ON THIN-LAYER
 PLATES", Bhatia, I. S., Singh, J., BaJaJ, K. L., Journal of Chromatography. Vol.
 79, May 16, 1973, PP 350-352.

          A sensitive chromogenlc reagent has been described that not only detects
 most of the naturally occurring phenolic compounds, but can also be used to detect
 specifically the ortho-dlhydroxy group on both Silica Gel G and polywnide thin
 layers.  Four mlcrograms of phenolic compounds dissolved in acetone were spotted on
 to thin-layer plates.  The plates were sprayed with chromogenic reagent I which
 consists of sodium tungstate, TCA, HC1, and sodium nitrite solution.  After 3 min,
 chromogenic reagent II (NaOH solution) was sprayed on the plates.  With polyamlde,
 after using reagent I, the thin layers are dried at 30 degrees for a few minutes and
 then lightly sprayed with reagent II.  Fifty-two phenolic compounds are listed
 giving the color reaction with the reagent on thin-layer plates.

 INDEX TERMS:  Phenols, Pollutant identification, Color reactions, Methodology,  Chemical
       analysis, Organic acids, Thin-layer plates,  Chromogenic  reagents,  Silica gel G,
       Polyamide, Aldehydes.
AMIC-805J*
"SEPARATION OF WTA AND EDTA CHELATES BY THIN-LAYES CHRQMATOGRAPHY", Rajabalee, F. J. M.,
Potvln, M., Laham, S., Journal of Chromatography, Vol. 79, May 16, 1973, pp 375-379.

          The chromatographlc behavior of metal-NTA chelates on silica gel is
described as well as their separation from the corresponding EDTA chelates.  The
metal-EDTA and metal-NTA chelates, and metal ions were applied to silica gel thin-layer
plates in aqueous solutions.  The amount spotted was 0.5 microgram for the metal ions
and NTA chelates, and 2 mlcrograms for the EDTA chelates.  The spots were revealed by
the spraying technique and the colors observed In daylight.  At high pH (solvents
containing more than 1 percent of ammonia) chelate decomposition occurs and, in several
cases, double fronts are observed.  Only the nickel-NTA chelates were stable under these
conditions.  In weakly basic and neutral solvents, separation occurred and reliable R
sub F values were obtained.  These were Identical for the different OTA chelates of the
same metal, irrespective of the number of HPA moieties in the molecule.   The TLC method
is rather effective for separating mixtures of EDTA and NTA chelates.   The metal cations
can also be distinguished by the characteristic colors observed with the  different spray
reagents used.  For a given divalent metal,  the NTA chelate migrates  faster in  the same
solvent than Its EDTA analog, being less polar than the latter.

INDEX TERMS:   Separation techniques, Pollutant identification,  Aqueous  solutions,  Color
      reactions, Alkali metals.  Heavy metals,  Methodology,  Thin layer  chromatography,
      Metal-EDTA chelates,  Metal-OTA chelates, Mixtures,  Chromogenic reagents.

-------
                                                                          1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
"HYDROCARBONS IN THE PELAGIC SAjgASSUM COMMUNITY", Bums, K. A., Teal, J. M.,
Deep-Sea Research and Oceanographlc Abstracts, Vol. 20, No. 2,  February  1973,
pp 207-211.
           •Dimples of pelagic Sargassum weed and associated macrofauna were collected
by dip-netting from ships using precautions against  shipboard contamination described by
Grice  et al  (1972).   Before  extraction,  the plants were  shaken free of animals  and washed
with pentane to remove  surface  contamination without disrupting the cells. These
washings were analyzed  to determine  hydrocarbonds adsorbed on the  plant surface.
Pentane-washed animals  were  gutted for stomach  analysis, cut Into  small pieces, soxhlet
extracted with distilled methanol for U8 hr, and this llpid extract partitioned Into
acid-washed, sodium distilled pentane.  The pentane  extract was concentrated, dried,
purified on  a 1:1 (vol:  vol)  column of alumina  over  silica gel, eluted and
chrooatographed on a 3  percent  Aplezon L on Chromasorb W AW-DM CS) column. All the
organisms appeared contaminated with petroleum  hydrocarbons.  There was no relation
between the  amount of natural,  recently blosyntheslzed hydrocarbons In an  organism and
the amount of petroleum contamination.  Animals had  a larger ratio of petroleum to
natural compounds than  the Sargassum.  There was no  relation between the hydrocarbon
content and  the animals supposed positions In the food chain.

INDEX  TERMS:   Chemical  analysis, Plant tissues,  Biological comnunities, Hater sampling,
       Gas chromatography, Marine algae,  Marine  fish, Crustaceans,  Food chains,
       Hydrocarbons,  Sargassum natans, Animal tissues, Fingerprinting, Sample preparation,
       Petroleum hydrocarbons. Natural hydrocarbons.
AMIC-3081
"PAR«THION EXPOSURE STUDIES.  A GAS CHRCMATCGRAPHIC METHOD FOR THE DETERMINATION OF
LOW LEVELS OF p-NITROPHENOL IN HUMAN AND ANIMAL URINE", Bradvay, D. E., Shafik, T. M.,
Bulletin of Environmental Contamination and Toxicology, Vol. 9, No. 3, March 1973,
PP

           A method for the determination of lov levels of p-nitrophenol in rat and
human urine was developed.  The method involves acid hydrolysis of urine, extraction with
benzene,  derlvatlzatlon of p-nitrophenol using an electron capture detector.  Recoveries
of fortified rat and human urine sanples averaged in the range of 85.97 percent.   The
limits of detectablllty were 0.05 PP«s for rat urine and 0.02 ppm for human urine.  The
method was applied to the  analysis of p-nitrophenol in urine of rats exposed to 0.1 and
0.01 LD50 of parathlon.

INDEX TERMS:  Urine,  Methodology, Chemical analysis, Organic compounds, Animal metabolism
      Electron  capture  gas chromatography, p-Nltrophenol, Sample preparation, Chemical
      recovery, Detection  limits.
AMIC-8083
"GEOTHEFMAL MERCURY POLLUTION IN NEW ZEALAND", Helssberg, B. G., Zobel, M. G. R.,
Bulletin of Environmental and Toxicology, Vol. 9, No. 3, March 1973j PP l"*8-155.

           In  connection with the study of the magnitude and extent of natural
mercury pollution arising from geothermal sources in New Zealand, rainbow and brown
trout and  sediments from the Walkato River lakes and some of the Rotorua lakes were
analyzed for  total mercury.  A modified, stannous chloride reduction-aeration
flameless  AA  technique,  after wet ashing with nitric and sulfuric acids was used in the
analysis.  Check  analyses, specific for methylmercury, were performed by gas
chromatography on half of the trout samples.  The results Indicate much higher
concentrations of mercury In trout living in waters receiving considerable geothermal
discharges (Upper Waikato River, Lake Rotorua, and Lake Rotomahana) than In trout
living in  similar waters receiving little or no geothermal discharges (Lake Taupo and
Lake Okareka).  The concentrations of mercury In trout within a given lake Increased with
increasing fish weight,  consistent with observations by others, and no distinct
differences in mercury concentrations were observed between rainbow and brown trout,
or between male and female trout of the sane species, apart from the weight factor.
The concentrations of mercury in sediments showed no apparent variation with increasing
depth (i.e. age) of sediments.

INDEX TERMS:  Mercury, Rainbow trout, Brown trout, Bottom sediments, Chemical analysis,
      Lake sediments, Fluvial sediments, Water pollution sources, New Zealand, Muscle,
      Reduction aeration technique, Flameless atomic absorption spectrophotometry,
      Sample preparation.
AMC-806U	
"ELECTRON CAPTURE GAS CHRCMATCGRAPHIC ANALYSIS OF DDA:   UTILIZATION OF  2-CHLCRO-iTHANOL
DERIVATIVE", Cranmer, M. F., Copeland, M.  F., Bulletin  of environmental  Contamination
and Toxicology, Vol. 9, No. 3, March 1973, pp 1B6-192.
                                                                                                     The use  of the 2-chloroethanol  derivative  is reported in the electron
                                                                                           capture gas chronatographlc analysis of DDA (the carboxylic acid metabolite of DDT).
                                                                                           The efficiency of  conversion of DDA to the 2-chloroethanol derivative was 91.5 plus or
                                                                                           minus 1.0 percent.   The  utilization of a  silica gel  column for clean up prior to
                                                                                          [ electron capture analysis Is discussed and the elutlon pattern for the 2-chloroethanol
                                                                                          | derivative Is given with a recovery of 97.3 plus or  minus 0.1 times more responsive to
                                                                                          j electron capture detection than the methyl ester of  DDA and produces a retention time
                                                                                           which separates the DDA  from other  chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides which might
                                                                                           Interfere with the  analysis.
                                                                                           INDEX TERMS:  Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides, Chemical analysis,
                                                                                                Identification, Electron capture gas chromatography, p p'-DDA.
                                                                    Pollutant

-------
                                                                           !•   PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL  METHODS
AMIC-8O90
"GLUCOSE FUIX AT THE SEDIMENT -HATER INTERFACE OF TORONTO HARBOUR, LAKE ONTARIO,
WITH REFERENCE TO POLLUTION STRESS", Wood, L. W., Chua, K. E., Canadian Journal of
Microbiology, Vol. 19, No. U, April 1973, PP U13-U20.
           Cycling of glucose at the sediment-water Interface was determined through
 coupling measurement of natural substrate concentrations with heterotrophic uptake
 by the natural mlcrobial comnunltles in the sediment and In the water column.
 Freshly collected cores containing both a sample of the water column above the
 sediroent-vater interface as well as 90 cm of undisturbed benthic community were
 used for glucose analysis.  The analysis for glucose followed the biochemical
 method of Hicks and Carey (1966).  Determinations of heterotrophy in water were
 done by the methods of Wright and Hobble (1966) as corrected for respiratory loss of
 C-1U02 by Hobble and Crawford (1969).  Determinations of aerobic heterotrophy In
 sediment were essentially the same as those using water except that the added
 glucose (5-20 mlcrollters) ranged from 27.5 to 102.5 mlcrograms/liter.  The same
 general cycling pattern was found for both polluted and less polluted parts of
j Toronto Harbour, so that other labile organic species possibly have similar cycles.
! Velocity of uptake of glucose (flux) and turnover time showed no relationship to
 either substrate concentration or total organic matter of the sediments.  Activity
 in the water column could be supported to a major extent by sediment export of
 substrate by turbulent diffusion.  Sediment activity must be supported by partlculate
 sedimentation and hydrolysis of large organic molecules, which may be aided by the
 macrobenthlc community.  Pollution stress apparently alters the catabolism of the
 substrate.  The observed substrate concentrations may reflect a minimum of residual
 concentration, below which the mlcrobial community has difficulty in taking up the
 substrate.	
 AMIC-8090 (Continued)
Card 2/2
 INDEX TERMS:  Cycling nutrients, Sediment-water Interfaces, Lake Ontario, Water pollution
       effects, Aquatic microorganisms, Water analysis, Lake sediments, Glucose,
       Heterotrophy, Nutrient flux, Fate of pollutants.
                    AMIC-8105
                    "IMPROVED WATER ANALYSIS KIT", Collins, W. H., Franklin Institute Research
                    Laboratories, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania, Report Nos. LWL-CR-03B69, FIRL-F3222-02/03,
                    Contract No. DAAD05-72-C-0113, December 1972, 20 pp.  NITS Report No. AD-756 952.

                              An Improved Water Test Kit which is smaller in size and simpler to use and
                    stock than Water Quality Control Set, FSN 6630-262-7288, Standard B, has been developed
                    by The Franklin Institute Research Laboratories for the U. 3. Army Land Warfare
                    Laboratory.  The kit has a minimum of glassware, weighs U 1/2 pounds, measures 9x6x6
                    inches and used techniques completely different than former methods.  Eliminated Is the
                    need of preparing reagents, performing titrations and other tedious measurements.  Most
                    of the tests are conducted by dipping a paper or plastic strip into the water sample and
                    reading the height of a column or comparing  the color obtained to a chart.  No
                    complicated calculations are required.  Water samples can be examined for pH, acidity,
                    alkalinity, chlorine residual, chlorine demand, chloride, sulfate, turbidity and
                    coagulation characteristics.  Each kit contains enough material to examine at least 50
                    water samples for each of the above characteristics before requiring refill.  The
                    simplicity of the kit allovs personnel with  little or no training to use it effectively.

                    INDEX TERMS:  Water analysis. Water quality. Equipment, On-slte tests, Testing
                          procedures, Instrumentation, Water properties, On-slte investigations, Physical
                          properties, Chemical properties.
AMIC-8108
"ANALYTICAL METHOD FOR DETERMINATION OF INORGANIC NITRITES IN NATURAL STREAM
WATER", Sam, D., Naval Ordnance Laboratory, Silver Spring, Maryland, Report No.
NOUTR-72-295, Contract No. ORD332005-201-23, December 26, 1972, 10 pp.  NTIS
Report No. AD-755 697.

          A sensitive and reliable procedure has been developed which Is applicable
for determination of Inorganic nitrites in natural stream water in concentrations as
low as 0.1 mlcrcmole/llter or for the determination of I.I* ppb of nitrogen.
Samples are concentrated by an Ion exchange procedure prior to the spectrophotometrlc
measurement of the nitrite In the form of an azo dye.  The spectrophotometric
measurement of the azo dye Is found to conform to Beer's lav.   The nitrite sample is
treated with sulfanllic acid and N-(l-Naphthyl)-ethylenediamlne dlhydrochlorlde to
form a red azo dye.  The dye is passed through a column of Dowex 1-X8, 50-100 mesh,
anlon exchange resin and then it Is eluted with 60 percent acetic acid.   The resulting
effluent Is measured In a Gary 16 spectrophotometer at 550 ran In a cell  of 10 cm
optical path.  Natural stream water samples were used to check the validity of the
procedure.

INDEX TERMS:  Nitrites, Water analysis, Natural streams. Chemical analysis, Methodology,
      Anlon exchange, Inorganic compounds, Spectrophotometry,  Water pollution, Color
      reactions, Nitrogen, Degradation (decomposition).  Pollutant identification,
      Natural waters, Detection limits, Sample preparation,  Ion exchange resins,  TNT.

-------
                                                                           1.   PHYSICAL AND CHEMTCM. METHOHS
 AMIC-8117
 "EVIDENCE FOR BUFFERING OF DISSOLVED SILICON I« FRESH WATERS", Edwards, A. M. C., Lias,
 P. S., Nature, Vol. 2l*3, No. 5I*06, June 1973, PP 3"*l-3^2.

           Documented studies are presented which Illustrate the low temporal and
 spatial variability found for dissolved silicon levels In freshwater.  Sorptlon
 reactions Involving dissolved silicon and solid phases are posed as the more likely
 buffer mechanism responsible for controlling the concentration of dissolved silicon In
 rivers, lakes and soils.
t
t INDEX TERMS:  Freshwater, Temporal distribution, Spatial distribution, Variability.
 AMIC-8136
 "MASS SPECTROMETRIC DETERMINATION OF DIETHYIDITHIOCARBAMATES",  Wood, B. C.,
 Skogerboe, R. K., Applied Spectr93¥ojiy 27, No.  1,  January/February 1973, pp  10-12.

           The determination of dlethyldithlocarbamate chelates  of As,  Cd,  Cu,  Pb,  and
 Ln by direct Insertion probe mass spectrometry  Is  reported,   extractions directly  Into
 the diethylammonlum dlethyldlthlocarbaraate-methyl  Isobutyl ketone (DADDC-MIBK)  solutions
 were carried out at the appropriate pH by the procedures outlined by Jpyner  and Flnley
j (1966), Nix and Goodwin (1970), and Trujillo (1971).  The extracts were stored in  clean
j vials from which microllter quantities were delivered to the quartz sample holder  of  the
I direct insertion probe.  The measurements made  on  the above  elements were  generally
 reproducible to plus or minus 10 percent.  Assuming an Instrument blank of 1 ng, each of
 these elements can be determined at levels ranging from 0.5  to  1 ng via this technique.
 Such determination capabilities are equivalent  to  0.01 ppm In a 10-ml  aqueous  sample
 extracted into 1 ml of HIBK using a 10-mlcroliter  sample of the extract for  the analysis.

 INDEX TERMS:  Heavy metals, Mass spectrometry.  Methodology,  Aqueous solutions,  Pollutant
       Identification, Chemical analysis. Cadmium,  Copper, Lead, Zinc,  Solvent  extraction
       extractions, Chelatlon, Metal chelates, Dlethyldithiocarbamates, Direct  insertion
       probe, Sample preparation, Organic solvents. Arsenic,  Reproduclblllty, Mass
       spectra, Detection limits, Accuracy.
 MIC-8128
 "ANALYSIS OF ORGANIC CONSTITUENTS PRESENT IN DRINKING WATER", Novak, J., Zlutlcky, J,
 KubeUta, V., Mostecky, J., Journal of Chromatography, Vol. 76, February 7, 1973, PP
 1*5-50.

           Polluted drinking water was extracted with carbon tetrachlorlde or
 nitrobenzene and the extracts were analyzed by GC-mass spectrometry.  The UV and IR
 spectra were also recorded.  A further extraction procedure consisted of bubbling an
 inert gas {helium) through the water and analyzing by GC-HS.  The carbon tetrachlorlde
 and nitrobenzene extracts did not reveal the presence of any organic compounds;
 however, when the Inert gas was bubbled through the water, several organic compounds
 were detected.  These were Cl-Cl* hydrocarbons, pentene, cyclopentane, cyclopene, and
 methylcyclopentane, cyclopentadlene, cyclohexane, cyclohexene, isobutanal,
 tetrachloromethane, benzene, trichloromethylene, chloroform, tetrachloroethylene,
 toluene, dlchloroethane, and xylene.  Although the source of the compounds was not
 determined,  it was concluded that the limit of detection with bubbling Inert gas
 through the  sample is two to three orders higher than with extraction by organic
 solvents.  One limitation of the method Is that substances which boll above 100 C
 cannot be  determined.

 INDEX  TERMS:   Separation techniques. Organic compounds. Potable water, GC-Mass
       spectrometry, Detection limits, Organic solvents, Inert gases. Gas bubbling.
 AMIC-81W*
 "IN SITU ACTIVATION ANALYSIS OF MARINE SEDIMENTS WITH CALIFORNIUM-252", Wogman, N. A.,
 Rieck, H. G. Jr., Kosorok, J. R., Perkins,  R.  W., Battelle Memorial  Institute, Pacific
 Northwest Laboratories, Rlchland, Washington,  Report No. CONF-721010-U, September  1972,
 Ik pp.  OTIS Report No. BNWL-SA-UU3I*.

           A seabed nuclear probe has been developed which permits the measurement of
 up to 33 elements at the parts per thousand to parts per million levels in continental
 shelf areas.  These elements Include S, Ca, Cl, Mo,  Mg, Al, F, K, Na, In, Ga, Nd, Nl,
 Co, Cu, Ba, Sn, V, I, Eu, TI, Cb, W, Sb, Dy, Ag» Os, Br, Rh, Pt, La, Ir, and As.  The
 probe consists of a neutron Irradiation source, californlum-252, which neutron activates
 the elements in the minerals of interest.   These resulting radio-active elements emit
 characteristic gamma radiation which is analyzed in situ In 2- to ID-minute counting
 intervals with a Ge(Ll) detector system. Details of the irradiation source, the Ge(Li)
 detector, and spectra taken In situ in a marine environment are discussed with respect
 to the detection of the minerals at concentrations of economic interest.

 INDEX TERMS:  Neutron activation analysis,  Sediments, On-site Investigations, Metals,
       Halogens, Detection limits, Cf-252.

-------
                                                                          1.  PHYSICAL ANn
                                                                                           AMic-8168	
                                                                                           "RESIDUES OF DDT IB COD FROM NORWEGIAN FJORDS", BJerk, J. E., Bulletin of Environmental
                                                                                           Contamination and Toxicology, Vol. 9, No. 2, February 1973» PP 89-97.
AMIC-816U
"FRITTED DISC FUHHELS AMD TAPERED STAINLESS STEEL TUBES AND STOPPERS FOR USE IB
PESTICIDE RESIDUE ANALYSIS", Levi, I., Howlckl, T. W., BuUetlnof Environmental
Contamination and Toxicology, Vol. 9, No. 1, January 1973» PP 20-23.
           It baa been shown that teflon and other gaskets In 'blender-extractor
 apparatus and filter papers give rise to interfering GLC peaks during analysis of
 pesticide residues In wheat and barley.  Two pieces of equipment were developed to
 avoid these problems.  The first was a fritted disc funnel for filtering residue
 extractions.  It consists of a pyrex funnel fitted with a 50 ran diameter medium
 porosity fritted disc which is annealed to the funnel.  The funnel requires suction.
 The second piece of equipment Is a stainless steel tapered tube and stopper assembly
 which requires no gaskets.  Schematic drawings of the tube and stopper are Included.

 INDEX TERMS:  Pesticide residues, Filtration, Laboratory equipment, Filters, Tubes,
       Chemical Interference, Sample preparation. Funnels, Gas liquid chromatography.
 AMIC-8165
 "EFFECTS OF FIXATION OH THE EXTRACTION OF DIELDRIN AND p,p'-DDT FROM MUSCLE TISSUE",
 Deubert, K. H., Tlnmerraan, J. S., McCloskey, L. R., Bulletin of Environmental
 Contamination and Toxicology, Vol. 9, No. 1, January 1973, PP .5^-56•
           Samples of muscle tissue were taken from codfish, smelt, and brook trout
and fixed In formalin or Bouin'a fixative to study the effect of fixation on
extraction of dleldrln and p,p'-DDT.  Frozen samples were used for reference.   The
results indicate  that the use of formalin or Bouin's mixture does not affect the
extractablllty of p,p'-DDT and dleldrln at the low levels occurring In environmental
samples.   As well, the results Indicate that tissue samples fixed In Bouin's solution
for histologies!  studies can still be used for dleldrln and DOT analysis.

INDEX TERMS:   Separation techniques, Freshwater fish. Marine fish, Dieldrin, DDT,
      Sample preservation,  Formalin, Biological samples, Fixation, Muscle, Bouin's
      fixative.
                                                                                                    Samples of cod from four fiords located at the south-western coast of
                                                                                           Norway were analyzed for DDT residues by GC.  At locality A there were large fruit
                                                                                           orchards and a small forest nursery.  At C there were fruit orchards,  while at B there
                                                                                           was a forest nursery only.  The fourth locality, D, had no known source of
                                                                                           contamination.  At A samples were collected at Intervals during the spring of 1970.
                                                                                           The DDT content In cod liver in samples from A and C was high.   The mean values  of
                                                                                           10-1$ specimens ranged between 12 and to ppm, calculated on a wet weight basis,  and
                                                                                           between 26 and 99 ppm, calculated on the basis of extractable lipids.   Three specimens
                                                                                           of cod showed residue levels of 90-135 ppm DDT in liver tissue.   DDT values In cod from
                                                                                           the two other localities were less than 5 ppm.  The specimens from A were  caught at
                                                                                           three sub-localities, and It was found that DDT levels decreased with Increased  distance
                                                                                           from the head of the fiord, where the majority of fruit orchards were located.
                                                                                           Significant correlations were found between fish size and DDT content in liver tissue,
                                                                                           but not in the sample from locality D.  The correlations were destroyed during the
                                                                                           spring breakup, the DDT content Increasing during this period,   o, p'-DDT was also found
                                                                                           In samples taken during May and June.  The high DDT levels were  attributed to the runoff
                                                                                           from fruit orchards located on steep slopes in this mountainous  area.

                                                                                           INDEX TERMS:  Gas ehromatography. Pesticide residues, DDT, Water pollution sources,
                                                                                                 Lipids,  Liver,  Muscle, Cod (fish).
                                                                                           AMIC-8171
                                                                                           tJAS-UQUID CHROMdTOGRAPHIC SEPARATION OF SULFUR FROM CHLORINATED PESTICIDE RESIDUES
                                                                                           IH WASTEWATER SAMPLES", Balrd,  R. B.,  Carmona, L. G., Kuo, C. L., Bulletin of
                                                                                           Environmental Contamination and Toxicology. Vol. 9, No. 2, February 1973, PP 108-115.
                                                                                                    Sulfur interference in the GC analysis of chlorinated pesticides was
                                                                                           eliminated by the  addition of 1.0  percent DC-200 to the column packing of k.k percent
                                                                                           OV-17 and I*. 7 percent QF-1 on 80/100 mesh Gas-Chrom Q solid support.  Samples of 13
                                                                                           chlorinated pesticides were analyzed with the column.  The effect of the DC-200
                                                                                           addition was  to shift the  major interfering sulfur peak between those of o.p'WJDE and
                                                                                           p,p'-CDE, thus eliminating the sulfur interference with the analysis of these
                                                                                           compounds without  diminishing the  resolution of the remaining pesticides of interest.
                                                                                           Routine use of this mixed  column demonstrated that satisfactory analysis of
                                                                                           sulfur-containing  wastewaters and  sediments may be performed without lengthy chemical
                                                                                           desulfurizatlon or extraction of large quantities of sample followed by detection with
                                                                                           a highly selective detector.

                                                                                           INDEX TERMS:  Water analysis.  Waste water (pollution), Sediments, Sulfur compounds,
                                                                                                 Separation techniques, Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides,  DDT, DDD,  Endrin,
                                                                                                 Dleldrln,  DDE, Aldrln, Heptachlor, Sulfur, Insecticides,  Pesticide residues.
                                                                                                 Chemical  interference, Gas liquid chromatography.  Column packing,  Heptachlor
                                                                                                 epoxlde,  Llndane, BBC.

-------
                                                                          1.   PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-8175
"COLORIM5TRIC ASSAY FOR CAKBCOOfMETHYLOXYSUCCINATE, A HEW DETERGENT BUHXER",
Vlccaro, J. P., Ambye, E. L., Journal of the American Oil Chemists' Society, Vol. 50,
No. 6, -Tune 1973, PP 213-817.

         A spectrophotometrlc assay was developed for the quantitative determination
of carboxymethyloxysusclnate (CMOS), a new detergent builder.  The method was based on
the color produced with beta-naphthol in 92.5 percent (w/w)  uulfuric  acid.  As little
as 1.0 mlcrogram  of carboxymethyloxysucclnate can be measured.   Pretreated  and
untreated samples from sewage effluents and river waters were prepared with solutions
of CMOS  ranging from 1 to 30 ppm.   The samples  were centrlfuged,  Mlllipore-filtered
through  a 0.22-mleron membrane,  and acidified with concentrated  HC1 to 1.0  N.  Milllliter
samples  were placed into  test tubes, evaporated to dryness and assayed according to the
prescribed procedure.  The CMOS  recovery values were aljnost  identical in both the sewage
effluent and river water  samples}  the mean absolute recovery values (least  squares
slopes)  were 97 and 96.1*  percent,  respectively. The recovery of similar amounts from
the same samples, which were treated as described under the  pretreatment procedure in
Materials and Methods, was 9^.5  percent for the primary sewage and 93.7  percent  for
river water.  The results of an  investigation to determine which compounds  may interfere
with  detection  of CM3S showed that under the prescribed assay conditions, glycolic,
lactic,  tartaric  and dextrose equal in weight to CMOS,  contributed only  1.2, 1.5, ^.7
and 1.5  percent errors, respectively.  These small errors could  be tolerated in  most
Instances.  Of  particular significance was the  lack of  interference from the Krebs cycle
intermediates,  citric, fun&ric,  malic, oxaloaeetic and  succinic  acids.   Formaldehyde and
acetaldehyde were also included  In this experiment but  displayed no absorbances, since
both  compounds  were removed during the evaporation step.  The addition of HC1 and
AMIC-8175  (Continued)
                                                                       Card 2/2
evaporation steps not only  permitted the use  of very dilute  samples  and an Initial
concentration of 92.5 percent for maximum sensitivity, but also provided additional
specificity to the method by  reducing Interferences from glycolic  and lactic  acids, and
dextrose.

INDEX TE»C:  Assay, DeterBents,  Methodology, Water analysis,  Pollutant identification,
      Swsctrophotometry,  Waste identification,  Colorlmetry,  Sewage effluents, Color
      reactions. Chemical reactions,  Waste water  (pollution),  Trlsodium
      carboxymethyloxysuccinate,  Chemical interference,  Sample preparation, Sensitivity,
      Accuracy, Quantitative  analysis,  Detection  limits.
 AMZC-8176
 "THE DETEFMINATION OF ALL rETECTABLE ELEMENTS IN THE AQUATIC PLAHTS OF LIHSLEY POND
 AND CEDAR LAKE( NORTH BRADFORD, CONNECTICUT) BY X-RAY EMISSION AND OPTICAL EMISSION
 SFECTROSCOPY", Cowglll, U.  M., Applied Spectroscopy. Vol. 27, No. 1, January/February
 1973, PP 5-9.

          A method,  employing optical  and x-ray emission.  Is described for the
 determination of all detectable elements in aquatic plants growing in the littoral zone
 of two lakes in  Connecticut.  The pondweed and the hornwort accumulate As.  Comparative
 data are presented  for  the  determination of this element  by atomic absorption and x-ray
 emission.  The chemical composition of some plants is  shown as well as the distribution
 of the rare earths  in various portions of the yellow water lily.

 INDEX TERMS:  Aquatic plants, Plant tissues, Methodology, Chemical analysis, Littoral,
       Leaves,  Root  systems, Floating plants, Rooted aquatic plants, Heavy metals,
       Alkali metals, Alkaline earth metals. Halogens,  X-ray emission Spectroscopy,
       Optical  emission  Spectroscopy, Chemical composition, Microphytes, Rare earth
       elements,  Llnsley Pond, Clear Lake,  Sample preparation. Stems, Blossoms.
AMIC-8178
"ATOMIC FLUORESCENCE SPECTBOMETRY WITH A GRAPHITE ROD ATOMIZER AND TJtERMOSTATED
ELECTHODELESS DISCHARGE LAMPS", Patel, B. M., Reeves, R. D.,  Browner,  R.  F., Moln&r,
C. J., Wlnefordner, J. P., Applied Spectroscopy. Vol. 27, No. 3,  May/June 1973, PP 171-
176.

         Atomic fluorescence investigations with a graphite rod atomizer  and
thermostated multiple element electrodeless discharge lamps (EDL's)  are reported for Ag,
Cd, Cu, Hg, Pb, Sn, Tl, and Zn.  Detection limits in the range 0.1 ng  to  0.01 pg have
been obtained for these elements using a sample volume of 0.5 mlcroliter.  The  detection
limits are better than, or close to, the lowest reported values obtained  by  other
workers using atomic spectrometric methods.  No spectral or chemical Interferences have
been observed when using multiple element EDL's or standard multielement  solutions. The
atomic fluorescence signal obtained using argon and argon-hydrogen atmospheres  has been
studied as a function of the gas flow rates and as a function of  height above the
graphite rod atomizer.  Except for Hg, better fluorescence signals are obtained with
argon-hydrogen.

INDEX TEIWS:  Heavy metals, Aqueous solutions,  Cadmium,  Copper, Mercury, Lead,  Zinc,
      Chemical analysis, Methodology,  Atomic fluorescence Spectroscopy, Multielenental
      analysis, Graphite rod atomizer, Electrodeless  discharge lamps,  Oil-based solutions,
      Detection limits. Tin, 'Hjalllum, Organometallics.

-------
                                                                          1.   PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-8187
 "GAS CHROHATOGRAPHY OF VARIOUS ELEMENTS AS FHEHYL COMPOUNDS",  Schwedt, G.,  Russel, H. A.
Zeitschrift fur Analytische Chemie,  Vol. 26t,  No.  k,  May 7,  1973,  PP 301-303.

          The phenyl compounds of thallium, selenium,  tellurium, mercury, arsenic,
 •tntlmony, bismuth and tin are suitable for the analysis of these elements by gas
 chroma tography.  They are produced quantitatively except thallium trlphenyl when the
 dlethyldlthloearbamatea, which are extracted out of acid solution, are reacted with
 magnesium organic compounds.  By gas chromatography the phenyl compounds of all eight
 elements are separated with one column by utilizing a temperature program.  In case of
 mercury dlphenyl complete elution could not be realized.  (In German)

 INDEX TERMS:  Heavy metals. Gas chromatography, Methodology, Pollutant identification,
       Organic compounds, Mercury, Separation techniques, Chemical analysis, Solvent
       extractions, Organometalllcs,  Rare earth elements, Thalluim, Selenium, Tellurium,
       Arsenic, Antimony, Bismuth, Tin, Mercury diphenyl, Thallium trlphenyl,
       Complexatlon, Selenium diphenyl, Tellurium dlphenyl. Arsenic triphenyl,  Antimony
       trlphenyl, Bismuth trlphenyl,  Tin tetraphenyl.
AMIC-8192
"DISTRIBUTION AND BACKGROUND LEVELS OF MERCUFY  IN SEDUCNT CORES  FROM SELECTED
WISCONSIN LAKES", Syers, J.  K.,  Iskandar,  I. K.  Keeney, D. R., Water, Alr^ and Soil
Pollution. Vol. 2, No. 1,  March  1973,  PP 105-118.
          The vertical distribution of Hg in sediment cores from a range of hard- and
 soft-water lakes In Wisconsin was evaluated In terms of potential sources of Hg during
 the nineteenth and twentieth centuries.  Core samples were collected in the winter of
 1970-1971 from deep-water areas from  each lake and two cores were also taken from
 •hallow water areas In Mendota and Minocqua.  Cores were sectioned at 5-on intervals
 and transferred to precleansed glass  bottles.  Surflclal sediments were collected with
 an Ekman dredge.  The samples were stored at U C and analyzed within a week post
 collection.  Total Hg was determined  on undried samples by wet digestion with H260l*/H!!03
 and subsequent flameless atomic absorption spectrophotometry.  A sub-sample was freeze
 dried and used for the determination  of organic C, free Iron oxides extractable with
 citrate-dlthionlte-blcarbona.te, and CaC03.  The pH of undried samples was measured with
 a  glass electrode.   An results were  expressed on an oven-dry basis.  For the Madison
 lakes  the trends  In Hg distribution were related to variations In sewage inputs during
 the last 80 yr.  It Is unlikely that either inputs of sewage or eroslonal products are
 responsible for the observed accumulation of Hg In the most recent sediments from three
 lakes in northeastern Wisconsin.  Background levels varied from 0.01 to 0.2U ppm of Hg
 (intact sediment basis)  In precultural sediments from the Wisconsin lakes Investigated.
There was no consistent  relationship between the concentration of Hg and other sediment
 component* of potential  Importance in the retention of Hg.
 INDEX TERMS'  Mercury  Cores, Lake sediments. Pollutant  identification, Spatial dletribu
              Mercury  Cores, Lake sediments.  Pollutant identification,  Spatial dletribu
             lamelSs 'atomlc'absorption epecirophotometry,  Vertical distribution.  Sample
      preparation.
                                                                                           AMIC-8193
                                                                                           "SULPHATE DEPOSITION BY PRECIPITATION INTO LAKE ONTARIO", Shaw, R. W., WhelpdiLLe, D. M.,
                                                                                           Water, Air, and soil Poimttop Vol. 2, tfo. 1, March 1973, PP 125-126.
                                                                                                     Samples of falling precipitation were collected three ttm^s at eleven jltes
                                                                                           along western lake Ontario.  Care vas taken that the -siunpllng vias don* during periods of
                                                                                           prolonged, continuous precipitation and also that the rjoUectors (suitably cleaned
                                                                                           polyethylene palls) were set out and taken In within approximately 1 hr of the beginning
                                                                                           and end of the precipitation, respectively.  Measurements of the aulfate concentration
                                                                                           in precipitation from Individual snow storms of several hours duration indicate that
                                                                                           approximately 9-66 mg/sq m of sulfate is being deposited per storm.  Using a mean
                                                                                           sulfate concentration In precipitation in this region (throughout the year) of U mg/1
                                                                                           and an annual accumulation of precipitation of 760 mm, the total annual deposition of
                                                                                           sulfate by precipitation alone is almost 3 g/sq m, or a total of 4,000 metric tons
                                                                                           over the western end of the Lake.  The annual deposition of sulfate by precipitation Is,
                                                                                           therefore, about 0.1 percent Of the total mass of sulfate.  This Is significantly of the
                                                                                                order of magnitude as that discharged directly Into the t.ake by Industry.
                                                                                           IMDEX TERMS:  Sulfatea, Water pollution sources, precipitation (atmospheric), Snowfall,
                                                                                                Lake Ontario, Fate of pollutants.
                                                                                           AMIC-8197
                                                                                           "30ME PROCEDURES FOR ISOLATING TOXIC METABOLITES OF PHOSPHOROTH10NATE PESTICIDES FROM
                                                                                           ANIMAL TISSUES AND FLUIDS", Machln, A. F., Proceedings of the Society for Analytical
                                                                                           Chemistry, Vol. 10, No. k, April 1973, pp 92-93.
          The chromatographic procedures used in separating the  metabolites  of
dlazlnon, together with some more recent improvements, are discussed.  The methods,
which Include thin-layer, gaa, column and high-pressure liquid chronatography, are
thought to be generally applicable to metabolites of phosphorothlonate pesticides.
Thin-layer chromatography Is useful both for recognizing toxic metabolites by their
Inhibition of eat/erases and for isolating them.   Gaa chromatography is used
extensively for detecting metabolites that contain phosphorus, determining residues
and monitoring the progress of purification.  A  thermionic detector is generally used:
its high and selective sensitivity probably make it more suitable than the specific
but less sensitive flame-photometric detector.  Gas chromatography is convenient for
isolating metabolites in mlcrograra amounts for mass spectrometry, for which  purpose
an Instrument designed especially for the collection of labile compounds Is  used.  It
Is not satisfactory for purifying the much larger amounts  needed for nuclear magnetic
resonance measurements, however, owing to the difficulty of collecting large fractions
quantitatively.  Column chromatography is tedious but so far has been the only way to
separate dehydrodlazlnon from the much larger amounts of dlazlnon and fat which
accompany it.  High-pressure liquid chromatography is now  being used for some of the
isolations.  Simple equipment, Including a puwp  built at the author's laboratory, is
used with a conmerclal ultraviolet detector.

INDEX TERMS:  Phosphothloate pesticides, Methodoloer, Chemical analysis, Isolation,
      Metabolites, Animal tissues, Body fluids.

-------
                                                                           1.   PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
 AMIC-8206
 "MSCHrtNIJMi OF TRACE METAL TRANSPORT IN RIVERS", Gibbs, R. J., Science, Vol. iflO,
 No. U081, April 6, 1973, PP 71-73.

           Trace metals transported by the Amazon and Yukon rivers were analytically
 partitioned among the transport phases:  In solutions, ion exchange, organic
 materials, metallic coatings, and crystalline solids.  All samples of water and
 suspended sediments were obtained at 60 percent of the depth of the main channel in
, both rivers, upstream of any Influence from salt water.  All samples were filtered
| under pressure within 2 hours after sampling, acidified with redistilled HC1 to pH
j 1,5 and  stored in polyethylene bottles.  The trace metals in solution were
 concentrated, extracted with MIBK and analyzed by atomic absorption spectrophotometry.
 The distribution for both rivers is similarly proportioned, with copper and chromium
 transported mainly in the crystalline solids, manganese In coatings, and Iron, nickel,
 and cobalt distributed equally between precipitated metallic coatings and crystalline
 solids.

 INDEX TKRMS:  Trace elements. Path of pollutants, Distribution patterns, Heavy metals,
       Ion exchange, Organic matter, Copper, Chromium,  Iron, Nickel, Cobalt, Manganese,
       Water sampling, Detritus, Chemical precipitation, Sediments, Adsorption, Dissolved
       solids, Chelation, Pollutants, Amazon River, Yukon River, Transport mechanisms,
       Metallic coatings, Sample preparation, Crystalline solids, Copreclpltatlon,
       Organometalli c s.
 AMIC-8212
 "POLYCHLOROBIPHENYLS IM NORTH ATLANTIC OCEAN WATER", Harvey, G. R., Stelnhauer, W. G.,
 Teal, J. M., Science, Vol. 180, No. 1*086, May 11, 1973, PP 6U3-6V*.

           Concentrations of polychloroblphenyls (PCB's) have been  measured at the
 surface and at various depths in the water of the North Atlantic Ocean between 26
 degrees N and 63 degrees N.  Water samples were either extracted with a hexane-ether
 mixture, concentrated, and analyzed by electron capture gas chromatography (ECGC) or
 pumped through a brass or glass column packed with Amberlite XAD-2 resin, eluted with
 boiling acetonltrile, diluted with distilled water or seawater; extracted with hexane,
 concentrated and analyzed by ECGC.  All analyses were completed on shipboard within
 1»  hours of sampling.  Unflltered seawater samples collected and analyzed simultaneously
 with water filtered through a 0.3-mlcron glass fiber filter or a glass wool plug
 contained a maximum of 10 percent more PCB than the filtered seavater samples.  Three
 observations can be made from the data:  (1) Although the range Is very broad, the
 concentrations of PCB's in the northern North Atlantic average 35 ngAs (35 parts per
 trillion (ppt))  in surface waters, and 10 ppt at 200 m.  (2) The PCB concentrations
 decrease with depth.  (3)  The surface waters of the Sargasso Sea (stations 25-1*1) have
 slightly lower surface  concentrations of PCB's (27 ppt) than surface waters In other
parts of the North Atlantic.   The widespread distribution of PCB's in the open North
 Atlantic supports previous observations that the atmosphere must be the predominant
mode of  transport.

 INDEX TERMS'   Polychlorinated blphenyls, Atlantic Ocean, Sea water, Surface waters, Water
      analysis, Pollutant  Identification, Organic confounds. Water pollution, Solvent
      extractions, Chemical analysis. Separation techniques, Electron capture gas
      chromatography. On board^analySls, Sample preparation, Sargasso Sea.	
                                                                                           AMIC-8229
                                                                                           "A  SIMPLE COULCMETRIC METHOD TOR THE DETERMINATION OF CHLORIDE IN NATURAL WATER",
                                                                                           Jacobsen, E., Tandberg, G., Analytica Chimica Acta, Vol. 64, No. 2, April 1973,
                                                                                           pp  260-283.

                                                                                                     A  study  was undertaken In order  to construct a simple Instrument for the
                                                                                           coulometrlc  tttratlon of  chloride  In water.  It wts found that a very Dimple
                                                                                           battery-operated constant-current  source can be used for Uie titratlons.  Experiments
                                                                                           shoved that  the current remained constant  during  the titration at a]1 settings
                                                                                           (0.1^-U mA).  A 1-nm silver wire was used as generating electrode.  The cathode
                                                                                           (1-mm silver wire)  was Isolated In a glass tube with a fine-porosity frltted-gLass
                                                                                           disc.  The shield  tube was filled  with the supporting electrolyte used In the sample
                                                                                           solution.  The end-point  was determined by applying a constant current of about 1.1
                                                                                           mlcroA between two treated silver  wire electrodes and recording the potential-time
                                                                                           curve with a strip-chart  recorder.  (Any kind of recorder with sensitivity In the
                                                                                           range 1-10 mV/s can be used, provided that it Is equipped with zero suppression).
                                                                                           The proposed method is simple  and  rapid and gives satisfactory results 1n the range
                                                                                           of  0.1-1OO mlcrograms of  chloride  per ml.  The method has the advantage that the blank
                                                                                           is  not affected by coloured substances like iron and humus.  Of common Ions bromide,
                                                                                           iodide, thiocyanate and cyanide Interfere  and must be absent from the solution; these
                                                                                           ions  Interfere also In the spectrophotometrlc method.

                                                                                           INDEX TERMS:  Chlorides,  Water analysis, Methodology, Chemical analysis, Electrolysis,
                                                                                                  Iodides, Bromides,  Iron, Humus, Pollutant identification, Coulometry, Natural
                                                                                                  waters, Detection limits, Ionic interference, Chemical Interference, Cyanides,
                                                                                                  Thlocyanates.
                                                                                           AMIC-8232
                                                                                           "EXTRACTION AND GAS CHROMATCGRAPHIC DETERMINATION OF KhTHYL-, ETHTL-, AND
                                                                                           METHOXYETHriMERCURY( II) HALIDEG", Ealy, J. E., Shults, W. D., Dean, J. A.,
                                                                                           Analytica Chlmlca Acta, Vol. 6U, No. 2, April 1973, pp 235-2U1.
                                                                                                     The  separation. Identification, and determination of methyl-, ethyl-, and
                                                                                           methoxyethylmercury(II) halldes In biological materials were studied.  The procedure
                                                                                           developed Involved a 2U-h leach with 1 M sodium Iodide, equilibration of the aqueous
                                                                                           phase for 2 mln with an equal volume of benzene, and then injection of an aliquot of
                                                                                           the benzene phase onto a gas chromatographlc column consisting of 5 percent
                                                                                           cyclohexanedlmethanol succlnate held on Anakrom AB3.  Excellent baseline separation of
                                                                                           the chromatographic peaks was obtained.  The extraction steps were monitored with
                                                                                           RHgX compounds tagged with Hg-203.  Partition coefficients are reported for methyl- and
                                                                                           ethylmercury(ll) chlorides, bromides, and Iodides; several overall formation constants
                                                                                           of the anlonlc complexes RHgCl sub n to the 1-n power (n equals 2,3)  were determined.
                                                                                           Results are reported for the recovery of methyl- and ethylnercury(II)  halldes from
                                                                                           Inoculated rye seed, humlc and Inorganic sediment, and fish grown in  an aquarium.   A
                                                                                           single 24-h leach of 1-g samples gave the following D values:   12.0 plus or minus  0.2
                                                                                           for inorganic sediment; 7.7 plus or minus 0.5 for organic sediment; 5.6 plus or minus
                                                                                           0.8 for fish tissue; and 9.0 plus or minus 0.5 for rye seeds.

                                                                                           INDEX TERMS:  Separation techniques, Pollutant Identification,  solvent extractions,
                                                                                                 Sediments, Fish, Seeds, Chemical analysis,  Biological samples,  Organomercury
                                                                                                 compounds, Electron capture gas chromatography,  Methylmercury halides,  Ethylmercury
                                                                                                 halides, Methoxyethylfflereury halides, Saraple preparation,  Chemical recovery,
                                                                                                 Reproducibillty.
                                                                                        26

-------
                                                                           1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-8233
 "THE NEW METHOD FOR THE DBTEFMINATION OF COBALT IN SEA WATER BY SOLVENT EXTRACTION
 WITH a-NITRO3O-5-DIETHYLAMINOPHEiroL", Motomizu, S. , Analytica Chlmiea Aeta, Vol.
 6U, No. 2, April 1973, PP 217-22U.

           A method 13 described for determining cobalt In seawater
 spectrophotometrieally by means ?-nitroso-5-diethylaroinophenol after extraction of the
 Complex into 1,2-dichloroethane.  This method eliminates preconcentratlon, requires
 relatively small volumes of sample solution, and provides simplicity and precision.
 The procedure was used in studying the effects of pH, shaking time, standing time and
 amounts of the reagent added on the extraction of cobalt.  The optimal pH range was
 U.5-8.5 for distilled water containing 0.21* microgram of cobalt, but 5-5-7.5 for sea
 •waters.  The minimal shaking time was 6 min in both cases, and a time of 10 min vas
 selected for certainty.  The standing time necessary for development Of the complex
 was only 10 rain, but a period of 30 rain was considered advisable.  When distilled
 water containing 0.2U ralcrogram of cobalt was used, maximal absorbance was obtained
 with a reagent addition of 10 ml of 0.2 percent solution per liter.  Those metal ions
 that are extracted along with the cobalt complex can be stripped completely with HC1,
 thus eliminating inteference.  Other metal ions and anlons existing commonly in
 seawater do not interfere.  The method Is applicable over the range 0-0.2k microgram
 Co/1 when 1-1 or 2-1 samples are taken.  The relative standard deviation Is U
 percent for 0.15 microgram Co/1.  The stability of cobalt In sea water samples is
 discussed.

 INDcX TUKMS:   Cobalt, Sea water, Methodology, Solvent extractions, Pollutant identifi-
       cation, Speetrophotometry, Water analysis, Chemical analysis, 2-Nitroso-5-
 	diethylaainophenol. Precision, Chemical Interference, Reproduclblllty.	
 AMIC-8231*
 "A SIMULTANEOUS DETERMINATION OF LEAD-210 AND POLONIUM-21Q IN SEA WATER", Noaakl, 1.,
 Tsunogai, S., Analytiea Chlrolca Acta, Vol. 6it, No. 2, April 1973, PP 209-216.

           A simpler and more precise method is described for the determination of
 lead-210 and  polonium-210 in seawater.  In the proposed method, these nuclldes are
 coprecipltated with calcium carbonate and then polonium is selectively separated from
 other nuclides by spontaneous deposition onto a silver disc.  The content of lead-210
 is measured by the activity of its granddaughter, polonium-210, produced during the
 storage  of the sample containing lead-210 for more than 3 months.  In the development
 of this  method, particular caution was taken to avoid the adsorption loss of
 pOlonlum-210  onto the wall of the container used during analysis and storage.  Replicate
 analyses done on about 1*5-1 seawater samples gave a counting error of about plus or
 minus 10 percent for Po-210 stored for about 5 months.  Seawater samples collected
 from the  North Pacific Ocean during the cruise of R/V Hakuho-maru, KH-71-3 In 1971
analyzed  by the  above procedure showed that the ratios of Po-210 to Pb-210 were
smaller than  unity in the surface layer of the ocean.

INDEX TERMS:   Sea water,  Radiochemlcal analysis, Methodology, Water analysis, Chemical
      analysis   Lead radloisotopes, Radioactivity, Chemical precipitation, Heavy metals,
      Pollutant  Identification, Pollutants, Pb-2K>, Po-210, Polonium radiolsotopes,
      Sample  preparation, Alpha spectrometry, Copreclpltatlon, Accuracy.
AMIC-6236
"THE DETEH4INATION OF SEXEN1LM IN SEA WATER BY OA3 CHROMATCGRAPHY. WITH ELECTflON-CAPTURE
DEJECTION", Shlmolshl, r., Analytica Chimica Acta, Vol. &4, No. 3, May 1973, pp
1*65-1*68.                   	

          A description  is given of a direct gps ehromatcgrap.'iic method for the
determination of selenium in seawater without preconcentratlon.  A volume of .iosiwHter
arid HC1 were combined in a separatory funnel to which was added 1 percent
U-nitro-o-phenylenediamine solution.  This mixture was allowed to stand for 2 hr and
the 5-nitropiaselenol formed was extracted into toluene by shaking for 5 rain.  The
toluene extract was washed with 7.5 M HC1 and 5-microliter aliquots were injected into
a gas chromatograph equipped with an electron capture detector, and the peak height
measured.  Seawater samples were prepared for the procedure by membrane filtration and
shaking with toluene to  extract toluene-soluble material.  This caused no loss in 3e.
Analysis of seawater samples showed an average 3e content of O.OU-0.08 plus or minus
0.01 microgram/1.  As even about 0.002 microgram of selenium in 1 ml of organic
extract can be detected  by this procedure, only 50-100 ml of sea water Is needed.

INDEX TERMS;  Sea water. Water analysis. Methodology, Gas chromatography, Chemical a
      analysis. Pollutant identification. Pollutants, Solvent extractions, Separation
      techniques. Electron capture gas chromatography. Selenium, Sample preparation,
      Detection limits,  U-Nitro-o-phenylenedlanine hydrochloride.
AMIC-82UO
"POTENTIOMETRIC STUDIES ON THIOACETAMIDE BY MEAN3 OF A SUU'HIDE lON-JKl.ECnVE M2MBHANE
ELECTRODE", Papay, M. K., Toth, K., Izvekov, V., Pujigor, E., Analytlr-a Chemlca Acta,
Vol. 6k, Bo. 3, May 1973, PP 1*09-1*15.

          The sulphide Ion-selective electrode has been found to be applicable to
the determination of thloacetamliie in the concentration range of 0.1-0.001 M by direct
potentlometry and tltratlon with silver nitrate.  The effects of the acid and alkali
content of the solutions on the titratlon reaction have been studied.  In alkaline and
slightly acidic solutions the product of the reaction is silver sulphide; In solutions
in Which the acid concentration exceeds 0.5 M, a precipitate of silver thioacetaraide is
fumed.  If the alkali concentration of the solution is lower than that corresponding
to the amount Of acid formed during the titratlon, another potential Jump occurs before
the end-point owing to the decrease of sulphide concentration governed by hydrolysis.

INDEX TEHHS:  Chemical analysis. Aqueous solutions, Pollutant Identification,
      Thloacetamide, Quantitative analysis, Potentiomstric titratlon, Ion selective
      electrodes, Sulflde electrodes.

-------
                                                                          1.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
AMIC-82^2
"ATOMIC ABSORPTION INHIBITION TITRATION OP ORTHQPHDSPHATE AND PODfPHOSPHATES",
Crawford, W. E., Lin, C.  I., Huber, C. 0., Analytiea Chlaica Acta, Vol. 6k, No. 3,
May 1973, PP 367-395-

           The atomic absorption inhibition titration of phosphates was studied for
 two types of turner.  It Involves titratlon of the anion solution with a metal cation
 solution while the atomic absorption signal for the metal Is monitored.  Magnesium was
 selected as the monitor metal because of its sensitivity for measurement and the high
 extent of Inhibition by refractory forming onions.  The onions selected in this study
 are ortho-, pyro-, tetra- and hexaphosphatea.  Observations were made with both total
 consumption and pre-mix slot burners.  A hydrogen-air flame was used in order to have
 the relatively low flame temperatures and the flame temperature control which Is
 necessary.  The method with a pre-mix burner was used to determine phosphate in surface
 and waste waters.  The results compared quite favorably with those by the standard
 method.  The proposed method was found to be rapid, simple and accurate.  A complete
 manual titration curve was obtained in less than 30 min and semi-automatic titration
 required less than 5 min.

 INDEX TERMS:  Aqueous solutions, Water analysis, Phosphates, Chemical analysis,
       Volumetric analysis, Methodology, Anions, Surface waters, Silicates, Waste water
       (pollution), Sulfates, Detergents, Pollutant identification, Water pollution,
       Polyphosphates, Orthophosphates, Atonic absorption spectrophotometry, Total
       consumption burner, Premix burner, Inhibition titration, Sensitivity, Gas flow
       rates. Accuracy, Chemical interference, Ionic interference.
 AMIC-82U5
 "ATOMIC EMISSION SPECTROMETRY WITH AN INDUCT TON-COUPLED HIGH-FREQUENCY PLASMA SOURCE.
 THE DETERMINATION OF IODINE, MERCURY, ARSENIC AND SELENILM",  Kirkbright, C.  F.,
 Ward, A. P., West, T. S., Analytlea Chlmica Acta, Vol. 6k, No.  3,  May 1973,  pp
 353-362.                              '

           The application is reported of an inductively coupled high-frequency
 plasma source to the determination of arsenic, iodine, irercury  and selenium  in
 aqueous solution by atomic emission spectronetry at wavelengths less 200 run.   In
j the apparatus used In this study, only a simple indirect nebulizer and expansion
 chamber are used to introduce aqueous sample solutions into the plasma. Optimal
 conditions have been established, and the spectral Interference effects at different
 atomic lines for each element have been Investigated.  With the type of instrumentation
 employed, the determination of iodine at 183.OU nm, mercury at  164.96 run,  arsenic at
 189.0 nm and selenium at 196.09 run is recommended to minimize spectral Interferences.
 No chemical or physical interferences resulting from the influence of foreign tons on
 the solute vaporization process have been noted.

 INDEX TEBM3:  Iodine, Mercury, Aqueous solutions, Cations, Anlons, Heavy metals. Chemical
       analysis, Alkali metals, Alkaline earth metals, Halogens, Arsenic, Selenium,
       Atomic emission spectrophotometry, High frequency plasma  source, Induction-
       coupled plasma source, Spectral interference, Detection limits.
AMIC-82U3
"THE DETERMINATION OF MOLYBDENUM IN SEA WATER BY HOT GRAPHITE ATOMIC ABSORPTION
SPECTROMETRY AFTaR CONCENTRATION ON p-AMINOBENZYICELLULOSE OR CHITOSAN", Muzzarelll,
R. A.  A., Rocchettl,  R., Analytiea Chimlca Acta, Vol. 6k, No. 3, May 1973, pp 371-379.

           A comparative study of the chelating ability of chltosan,
p-aminobenzylcellulose ana diethylamlnoethylcellulose, for a number of metal Ions Is
discussed.   There  Is  a strong interaction between molybdenum and these polymers in
thlocyanate  solutions and In sea water.  By combining the sensitivity of graphite-
furnace atomic absorption spectrometry with the efficiency of the selective collection
of molybdenum on p-amlnobenzylcellulose or chitosan at pH 2.5, it was possible to
determine molybdenum  in as little as 50 mg of sea water.

INDEX TERMS:  Molybdenum, 3ea water. Chemical analysis. Separation techniques,
      Chelation, Cations, Water  analysis, Methodology, Anlons, Pollutant Identification,
      Hot graphite atomiser,  Atomic absorption spectrophotometry, Preconcentration,
      p-Amlnobenzylcellulose,  Chitosan, Chemical Interference.
 AMIC-8257
 "PRECISE SHIPBOARD DETERMINATION OF DISSOLVED NITROGEN,  OXYGEN, ARGON, AND TOTAL
 INORGAHIC CARBON BY GAS CHROMATOGRAPHY", Weiss,  R.  F,, Craig, H., Daep-Sea. Research and
 Oceanographie Abstracts, Vol.  20, No.  U, April 1973,  pp  391.303.
           A seagoing gas chromatographic system for the  rapid and precise
 determination of dissolved gases In sea water  Is described.  Separate Instruments are
 employed for total Inorganic carbon, and for nitrogen, oxygen, and argon analyses.
 Factors affecting the design, calibration,  and shipboard operation of the system are
 discussed in detail.   Results of intercomparisons vlth other analytical techniques
 confirm the accuracy  of the gas chromatographic method.  Profiles of Sigma COS, 02, and
 N2 measured aboard ship are presented and discussed.

 INDEX TERMS:  Dissolved oxygen, Gas chromatography,  Sea  water, Chemical analysis, Water
       analysis,  Instrumentation, Calibrations,  Methodology, Pollutant Identification,
       On-site data collections, On-site Investigations,  Shipboard measurements,
       Dissolved  nitrogen,  Dissolved carbon, Dissolved argon, On board analysis, Dissolved
       gases, Thermal  conductivity gas chromatography, Precision, Accuracy,
       method.
                                                                                        28

-------
                                                                           1.   PHVSTr.AT
 AKIC-8256
 "HYDROCARBONS FROM SEA WATER", Barbier, M., Joly, D., Saliot, A., Tourres, D.,
 Deep-Sea Research and Oceanographlc Abstracts, Vol. 20, No. k, April 1973, pp 305-311*.
           Dissolved hydrocarbons have been extracted by means of  chloroform, from
 coastal and Open sea. waters; after  isolation of  the unsaponiflable  fraction and
 preparative thin-layer  chromatography,  there were analyzed by (jes-liquld  chromatography
 and mass  spectrometry.  Hydrocarbons represent ca 20 percent of  the total extracts;
 concentrations may vary from 10 to  lUO  micrograms 1.  N-Paraffins occur to an extent of
 ca 12 percent, from n-ClU  to n-C37, vlth  a maximum at n-C27 to n-C30;  odd carbon
 paraffins are not predominant.  Sea vaters of different origins (collected at depths of
 as much as UjOO metres) shov a similar  composition in dissolved hydrocarbons; this
 composition does not differ much from the hydrocarbons usually found in algae.  A
 probable  hypothesis is  that sea-water hydrocarbons originate from the  mlcro-or macro
 phytoplankton.  Coastal waters clearly  indicate  pollution by hydrocarbons of lower
 molecular weight or chlorinated hydrocarbons.

 INDEX TKRMJ:  oca water, Mass spectrometry, Water analysis, Chemical analysis, X-ray
       fluorescence, Pollutant identification, Atlantic Ocean, Dissolved organic matter,
       Hydrocarbons, Gas liquid chromatography.
 AMIC-8281
 "LEAD OUTPUTS IN STREAMFLOV FROM A WATERSHED ECOSYSTEM",  Rolfe, G., Edglngton, J.,
 Water Resources Bulletin,  Vol.  9, No.  2,  April  1973,  PP 372-375.
           A study was undertaken to understand and mathematically model  the movements
 and effects of lead in an ecosystem.  The ecosystem used in the  study vao i wnurshed
 vhich was 8k percent agricultural and i6 percent urban.   Lead  emitted through  the
 combustion of gasoline containing tetraethyl lead was  considered to be the pi-<- lominant
i source of lead Input to the ecosystem.  The primary exit was through ;'treamflow,
I including lead associated with suspended sediments.  Jtreamflow  was continuously
I monitored with k stream gaging stations and continuous duty automatic water samplers
 were developed to collect water samples at each location.   The liquid portion of the
 water sample was analyzed by anodic stripping voltammetry.   Concentrations were generally
 In the 0 to 15 ppb range.  Suspended solids in the sample  were removed by filtration
 with a 5-mlcron milllpore filter and analyzed separately.   The ratio of  lead associated
 with suspended solids to lead dissolved in the filtrate  varied from approximately 29:1
 to 2:1 In the urban compartment.  In the rural compartment the same ratio varied from
 5:1 to 1:1.  In comparing total lead output from the watershed with total lead  input
 for the same six-month period, it appeared that only about 2-3 percent of the  lead  Input
 vaa exiting through the water system.  This Indicates  a large  buildup of lead  in
 ecosystems of this type.  Possible accumulation points In  the  ecosystem  Include stream
 bottom sediments, soils, and biota.

 INDEX TERMS:  Lead, Watersheds (divides). Urban drainage,  Agricultural runoff,  Streamflow
       Discharge (water), Ecosystems, Path of pollutants, Suspended solids.
 AMIC-8265
 "RESIDUE DETERMINATION OF CTHYLENETHIOUREA (2-IMIDA20LIDINETHIONE)  FROM TOMATO POLLAGE,
 SOIL, AND W/iTER", Blazquez, C. H., Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry, Vol. 21,
 Bo. 3, May/June 1973, PP 330-332.

           A thin-layer chromatographic  method was developed for  the analysis of
 ethyl«nethlourea (ETU) (2-lmidazolldinethlone) from tomato foliage, soil, and water.
 High yields of ETU were obtained when heat was applied during the evaporation of
 dloxane-water suspensions of the fungicides ethylenethluram monosulfide (ETM) and
 ethyleneblsdlthlocarbamate (Dithane M-U5).  Investigations Indicate that no ETU was
 detected from Dlthane M-^5 applications on tomato foliage, soil  surface, or ditch water.
 The tic  method had a sensitivity of 1 ppm, which Is adequate In  residue analysis
 experiments.   ETU was detected as low as 1 ppm with the tic method, a concentration
 adequate in field investigations of the degradation of ethylenebisdlthiocarbamate
 fungicide residues and their biological activity.  The tic method coupled with a
bloassay technique fit well Into residue monitoring (RM) method  of  the  EWDC system for
more efficient timing of pesticide applications.

INDEX TERMS:   Pesticide residues, Soil  contamination, Water pollution,  Foliar, Bloassay,
      Pollutant Identification, Chemical analysis, Tomatoes, Ethylenethlourea, Detection
      limits,  Thin layer ehromatography, Maneb, Zlneb, Dithane M-l*5, Sample preparation,
      Sensitivity.
 AMIC-8285
 "DISTORTION OF MIREX RESIDUES IN IN3SCTS OWING TO USE OF  I.50PKOPYL ALCOHOL A.5 A
 COLLECTION SOLVENT", Carlson, D. A.,  Banks,  W. A., Wojclk, D. P., Bulletin of
 Environmental Contamination and Toxicology,  Vol. 9, No. 6, June  1973, pp 3&5-369.
           Collection or storage  of Insects  in  70  percent  isopropyl alcohol (IPA) was
 found to cause  loss  of body weight, major loss of nonpolar Insecticides from submerged
 specimens, and  transfer of insecticide to previously uncontaminated specimens.  These
 effects may by  no means be limited to mlrex, since any chlorinated hydrocarbon is
 relatively llppphllic and nay behave similarly.   Residues reported for treated insects
 that have been  collected or stored In alcohol  may have been reduced to 12 percent of
 the original value.   Moreover, small untreated vertebrates and invertebrates trapped
 In alcohol with Insecticide-laden insects are  likely to absorb significant amounts of
 Insecticide for the  solution.

 INDEX TERMS:  Pesticide residues,  Pollutant identification. Insects, Chlorinated
       hydrocarbon pesticides, Mlrex, laopropyl alcohol, Sample preservation, Sample
       preparation.

-------
                                                                           I.  PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL METHODS
  AMC-8286
  "CHLORINATED HYDROCARBONS IN PLANKTON FSCM THE GULF OF MEXICO AND NORTHERN CARIBBEAN",
  Glam, C. 5., Wong, M. K., Hanks, A. R., Sackett, W. M., Richardson, R. L., Bulletin of
  Environmental Contamination and Toxicology, Vol. 9, No. 6, June 1973, PP 376-302.

            During 1971 and 1972 a baseline study of pollutants in the open Gulf of
  Mexico and Northern Caribbean, sponsored by the International Decade of Ocean
  Exploration, was conducted.  Plankton samples were collected over extensive areas of the
  Gulf of Mexico and Northern Caribbean.  The samples were analyzed by electron capture
  gas chromatography for DDT, its metabolites and PCBs, in order to determine the
  concentration and distribution of these contaminants in the lowest levels of the marine
  food chain.  From the results, it appears that DDT's and PCB's are widely spread but at
  a low level.  There  were few discernible geographic trends in the sampled areas.  About
  70 percent of the samples gave higher PCB than DOT values.  No definite trend can be
  observed from the PCS/DOT ratio of the samplesanaly zed.  Generally, the total DOT and
  PCB levels in plankton sangjles Is comparable to that in small whole fish and muscle of
  some larger fish.
 1 INDEX TERMS:  Plankton, Polychlorinated biphenyls, DDT, Chlorinated hydrocarbon
        pesticides, Sampling, Gulf of Mexico, Chemical analysis. Solvent extractions,
        Pollutant identification, Marine animals, Marine plants, Zoqplankton, Phytoplankto
        Phytoplankton, 3ea water, Metabolites, Caribbean Sea, Electron capture gas ch
        chromatography, Sample preparation, Aroclor 1242, Aroclor 12b8, Aroclor 125U,
        Aroclor 1260, Detection limits.
 AMIC-8308
 "KINETIC  MICRODBT2RMINATION OF MERCURY IN NATURAL WATERS AND BIOLOGICAL MATERIALS",
 Ke, P.  J.,  Ttilbert, R. J., Mikrochimica Acta, No. 3, 1973, pp »*17-l*27.

           A wet digestion has been developed to prepare water and biological
 samples for a kinetic determination of mercury using an iodide-catalyzed reaction
 between cerium(IV)  and arsenitefIII).  A mercury-free control, prepared using
 ion-exchange with a selective chelatlng resin, was used by adding mercury standards to
 make a  calibration  curve.   Both Inorganic and organic mercury can be determined by the
 method  described either In water or biological samples containing mercury In the range
 of 0.05 to  2.0  mlcrograms  per ml.   The procedure can be used satisfactorily down to the
 0.005-ppm level for fresh  water and urine with an overall error of less than 5 percent.
 The method  can  also be employed for the determination of mercury In sea water or blood
 serum with  an error of 10  percent  or less and gives results which compare favourably
 with other procedures.

 IMDEX  TERMS:  Mercury, Methodology,  Chemical analysis, Mater analysts. Heavy metals,
       Urine, Chemical reactions, Chelatlon,  Freshwater, Sea water, Rivers, Lakes,
       Biological samples. Trace levels, Ion  exchange resins, Detection limits, Blood
       serum, Errors, OrganonKrcury compounds,  OrganOmetalllcs, Body fluids, Natural
       waters, Sample preparation.
AMIC-83U)
"MICRO AND SQCXICftO DETEHtlNATION OF THIOLS WITH ION-SELECTIVE ELECTRODES",  Sells,  H-*
Mikrochlmlca Acta, No. 3, 1973. PP U53-U66.
          Described is the potentlometrie determination of a variety of thiols.
Microanounts (0.01 to 0.1 mM) are titrated with 0.01 K mercuric perchlorate while
seraloicroaniounts (0.1 to 0.5 mM) are titrated with 0.05 N mercuric perchlorate.   A
bromide  selective Indicator electrode and a single-Junction reference electrode  are
used with an expanded-scale pH meter to monitor the emf.  Other indicator electrodes
based on a  silver sulfide matrix may also be used.  The preferred solvent is acetone
while ethanol and p-dloxane have limited applicability.  The electrode response  is
slower in general than for other tltratlons using ion-selective electrodes,
particularly for the more complex thiols and those attached to a heterocyclic ring
system.

INDEX TERMS:  Sulfur compounds, Pollutant Identification, Methodology, Electrochemistry,
      Ion selective electrodes, Trace levels, Thiols, Potentlometrlc tltratlon,
      Reproduclbility, Iodide electrodes, Sulfide electrodes, Chloride electrodes,
      Copper electrodes, Lead electrodes, Bromide electrodes.
AMIC-8312
"ATOMIC ABSORPTION SPECTROMETRY OF TRACES OF TRI- AND HEXAVALEMT CHROMIUM",  Yanagisawa,
M., Suzuki, M., Takeuchl, T., Mlkroehlmice. Aeta, No. 3, 1973, PP ^-ItBO.

          Atomic absorption spectrometry combined with extraction has been shown to
be a rapid and precise method (reproduclbility of plus or minus 1 to approximately 2
percent for 5 determinations) for the determination of traces of tri- and hexavalent
chromium.  The chromium diethyldithlocarbamate chelate was used for  chromlumfVI),
whereas hydroxyqulnolate or thenoyltrifluoracetonate chelate  for chromlum(lll).  A series
of solutions In the range of pH 2 to approximately 8 was  prepared and investigated to
confirm the optimum pH range for extraction of chromium chelates.  The optimum pH  range
for quantitative extraction of chromium chelates is 5 to  approximately 7-  Two
extractions wars necessary for complete extraction of the chromium hydroxyquinolatft.
Acetate buffer was suitable for the extraction of the chromium chelate, In contrast  to
poor extraction results in a phosphate buffer.  Fe, Cu, Al, V,  and Mo did not Interfere
with Cr absorption.  The optimum flame conditions were:  flow rate of air, 6 1/raln;
flow rate of acetylene, 2 I/rain; beam height, 10 mm above burner top.

INDEX TERMS:  Pollutant Identification, Chemical analysis, Methodology, Aqueous
      solutions, Chromium, Hydrogen Ion concentration,  Trace  levels, Atomic absorption
      spectrophotometry, Metal chelates, Reproduclbility.
See also:  Category  2, AMIC-7703,  7752, 7859, 7979, 8321
           Category  3, AMIC-8207
           Category  S, AMIC-7895,  8194, 8214, 8239.

-------
                                                                                   BIOLOGICAL METHODS
 AMIC-6908
 "SOME MARINE DIATOMS FROM THE GALAPAGOS ISLANDS", Hendey, K.
 Nos. 1-8, 1971, PP 371-1*22.
                                                              I., Mora Hedwigia, Vol. 22,
          One hundred and seventy-six specific taxa of marine diatoms have been
 Identified and four previously unknown taxa have teen described from material
 collected by Dr. Ira L. Wiggins from Isla Fernandina, Galapagos Islands, on January 27»
 1967.  The material vas taken from foam washed up by surf at Punta Espinosa.  Hie
 classification used is according to Hendey (1958, 1961*).  Descriptions are given only
 of the lesser known taxa; the only reference cited is that In which the species was
 first described.

 INDEX TERMS:  Diatoms, Marine algae, Speciation, Classification, Chrysophyta, Varieties,
       SyGtemntics, Plant groupings, Galapagos Islands.
 AMIC-6913
 •THE PHYSIOGNOMY AND STRUCTURE OF THE BESTHIC MACROPHYTE COMMUNITIES OH ROCKY
 SHORES IN THE SOUTHWESTERN ARCHIPELAGO OF FINLAND (SEILI ISLANDS)", Ravanko, O.,
 Hova HedvlgLa. Vol. 23, NOB. 2-3, 1972, PP 363J»CJ».
          The physiognomy and structure of the benthic macropbyte communities on rocky
 shores in the southwestern archipelago of Finland (Sell! Inlands) have been studied.
 Rows of 1 «q m quadrats were marked out along 23 lines, their vegetation was mapped
 and the maerophytes were then harvested.  The species were determined and belts were
 named according to the dominant species.  The fresh and dry weights and the ash content
 of the material were determined.  The vegetation can mostly be divided into three main
 belts:   the Cladophora, Fucus and Potamoeeton belts.  Besides differing In species
 composition these three belts' also differ in blomass.  For comparison, the water and
 ashcontents of some Individual species were determined.  The ash contents differ
 areatly between the species.  Some taxonomlc problems and sources of error in the
 ^search «£hcds are treated.   The extent to which the vegetation of the study area
 H tSplcaTof the southwestern archipelago of Finland is discussed, and some of the
results  are  compared with those from other areas.
TMTIFY TfMK-
IHDEX TERMS.
                        Marine plants. Biological communities, Benthic flora, Marine
                                       Phaeopnyta, Rhodophyta, Marsh plants, Finland,
                                        environment, Vegetation profiles, Spermatophytes.
                                                                                       31
AMIC-7559
 "ARTIFICIAL RESERVOIR DESTRATIFICAnOH EFFECTS ON HCrTOPLANKTON", Lackey, R. T.,
Journal Water Pollution Control Federation. Vol. U?, No. U, April 1973, PP 668-673.

         A 19-ha Colorado montane reservoir was kept thermally destratifled by
continuous aeration for 1 yr.  Samples were taken on a single day near the middle
of each month from five permanently marked stations and consisted of four 3-liter
hauls taken at each 0.5-m depth within each 2-m stratum.  Samples were strained
through a 75-ran meeh net, preserved in I* percent formaldehyde, and enumerated in
Palmer counting cells.  Individual plankters were enumerated where practical, but
colonies and chains were also treated as Individuals.  Statistical methods vere
used in analyzing the results.  Total phytoplankton abundance was reduced, but
phyla varied in their response.  Green phytoplankton (Chlorophyta) decreased In
abundance and diatoms (Baclllarlophyceae) were nearly eliminated during
destratlflcatlon.  Blue-green alf^e (Cyanophyta), however, Increased in abundance
and this phenomenon may limit the use of destratIfication in water management.
Vertical distribution of phytoplankton was not affected by destratlflcatlon.

INDEX TERMS:  Phytoplankton, Reservoirs, Environmental effects. Aeration, Chlorophyta,
      Cyanophyta, Sampling, Pyrrophyta, Thermal destratlficatlon. Vertical distribution,
      Sample preservation.
AMIC-7568
"EFFECT OF INCUBATION TEMPERATURE ON THE MACROMDLECULAR AND LIPID CONTENT OF THE
PHYTOFLAGELLATE OCHROMONAS DANICA", Aaronson, S., Journal of Phyoology. Vol.  9,  No.  1,
March 1973. PP 111-113-

         Ochrouonas danlca grown in a chemically defined medium under controlled
conditions at different Incubation temperatures showed marked changes In  chemical
composition and secretory pattern.  As the incubation temperature rose from 15 to 30 C,
the cell number per unit volume of medium increased; the cell mass reached a  maximum and
then declined slightly, and the weight per single cell decreased.  The chemical
composition of the cells changed with increasing temperature:   carbohydrates  decreased
dramatically; proteins quadrupled at 20 C and then declined 25 percent; lipids
increased to about UO percent of maximum at 30 C.  The extracellular  secretion by the
cells of carbohydrates seemed to increase and then decline;  RNA decreased;  proteins
increased; and liplds remained approximately constant,  as the  temperature  Increased.
Increased oxygen utilization in the decay process that  may result  from these  changes
and lower oxygen solubility in warmer waters may well enhance  the  eutrqphlcation
process already rampant In much of our aquatic environment.  On the other hand,
knowledge of the ecological changes produced by thermal pollution  at the primary  food
chain level may permit the exploitation of this pollutant for  aquaculture.

INDEX TERMS:  Cytological studies,  Thermal stress,  Environmental effects, Proteins,
      Liplds, Aquatic algae,  Carboliydrates,  Biomass,  Ochromonas danlca. Chemical
      composition,  RKA,  Culture media.

-------
                                                                               2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
 AMIC-7578
 "SWINWHG PERFORMANCE OF YOUNG ATLANTIC SALMON (SA1JO 5ALAR)  AS AFFECTED BY REDUCED
 AMBIENT OXYGEN COHCEHTRATIOB", Kutty, M. N.,  Saunders, R.  L., Journal of the Fisheries
 Research Board of Canada, Vol. 30, No. 2, February 1973,  PP 223-227.

          As oxygen concentration Is lowered,  a point is reached, the critical
 oxygen level, at which juvenile Atlantic :;nlinon (Salmo salar) stop swimming In a tunnel
 respiroraeter.  At concentrations Just above the critical level, salmon frequently
 lose position in the upstream end of the respirometer and fall back to the downstream
 end while still headed into the current.  There appears to be a progressive decrease In
 locomotor activity, Indicated by reduced tailbeat frequency,  on approaching the critical
 concentration.  Swimming performance of Atlantic salmon is more highly dependent on
 oxygen concentration than is that of rainbow trout (Salmo galrdnerl), goldfish (CarasBlua
 auratus), or Tilapla.  The critical oxygen level for salmon swimming at 55 cm/sec Is
 about i*.5 rag/liter, In comparison with ?.0 for rainbow trout, 1.7 for goldfish, and  1.0
 for Tllapia.  Eetween the minimum speed at which a salmon swims steadily and the
 maximum of which the fish is capable, the critical oxygen level rises with Increase  in
 swimming speed.  Stoppage of swimming at the critical level Is not ovlng to fatigue;
 fish resume swlmnlng within minutes of the oxygen level being raised only  slightly.
 The high critical oxygen levels for salmon in relation to Other species including
 rainbow trout, another salmonld, point up the need for maintenance of stringent water
 quality criteria for oxygen levels In salmon rivers.

 INDEX TERMS:  Atlantic salmon, Oxygen sag, Fish behavior,  Swimming, Juvenile fish,
       Laboratory tests, Water pollution effects. Dissolved oxygen,  Bloassay, Smolt,
       Salmo salar, Salmo gairdnerl, Caraesius auratue, Goldfish.
 AMIC-7591
 'ANNUAL LIFE CYCLE AND PRODUCTION OF THE CHAETOGBATH SAGICTA ELEGANS IN BEDFORD BASIN,
 NOVA  SCOTIA", Sameoto, D.  D.,  Journal of the Fisheries Research Board of Canada, Vol.
 30, No.  3,  »irch 1973, PP 333-3ET         ~     "

          A  study has been made on the population of Sagitta elegaps in Bedford
 Basin for which comparable data on the basic production system are available (Sameoto,
 l<371a)   Horizontal and oblique samples of zooplankton were taken after dark at five
 stations inside and two stations  outside the Banln.  The samples were analyzed within
 a  week Of collection.  S. elegans over 5 mm long were removed, counted, and weighed
 af£r blotting on filte? pap^rf-The remaining sample was splitand the stages of S.
 eleaans less than 5 mm were counted.  Free water was removed frm the sample of
 fofflxL obtained upon sorting and the sample weighed to obtain a blomass estimate.

            —-               --               sr£2:
y^±dP^Suct?on   It £r£ScS.2i that tte secies used 90.U kcal per sq m per
 :£rP£ £3£S£.   ^rpercenige of the total yearly production of copepods consumed
 v S. clegana was  estimated at 36 percent.

 ;BDGX TERMS:
      rates,
AMIC-7618
"DESIGN OF A TRfcPEBT WITH IHTERCHA1IGEABLE PARTS FOR THE CAPTURE OF LARGE AND SMALL
FISHES FROM VARYING DEPTHS", Beamish, R. J.,  Journal of the Fisheries Research Board
of Canada, Vol. 30, »o. U, April 1973, PP 587-590.

         A new design is described for a convertible trapnet  that is effective in
catching small and large fishes In depths ranging from 3 to 15 ft (1-5 m).  Fhe nets
are constructed from 1/32-lnch (0.8-nm) square mesh, green mosquito-type nylon netting.
Details of construction are Included.  Three  designs have been successfully tested:  (l)
a basic 3-ft design, weight 31 Ib; (2) a 9-ft net,  weight 1»8  Ib, that converts to the
basic 3-ft design, and (3) a 6-ft net, weight 35 Ib, that is  smiliar to the 9-ft model
but reduced in proportions and not convertible.  These three  designs when fished in
Wolf Lake (Sew York) captured nine of the ten species reported to be present.  Trapnets
of similar design have captured many other species  of small and large freshwater fishes
including arctic char, lake whlteflsh, rainbow trout, walleye, and yellow perch.  They
have also fished successfully In some marine  habitats.

INDEX TERMS:  Fishing gear, Freshwater fish.  Marine fish,  Design, Fabrication, Depth,
      Convertible trapnets, Trapnets, Wolf Lake.
AMIC-7621
"DESCRIPTION AND ECOLOGY OF HYALELLA TEXAHA H. SP.  (CRUSTACEA: AMMUPODA) FROM THE
EDWARDS PLATEAU OF TEXAS",  Stevenson,  M. M., Peden, A. E., The American Midland
Naturalist, Vol. 89,  No. 2, April 1973, PP
         Hyalella texana,  a new species of amphipod crustacean, Is described from
Clear Creek Spring,  Menard County, Texas, 16.7 km W of Menard.  It Is distinguished
from H. azteca,  which also occurs at this locality, by the presence of four large
tergite spines,  enlarged mouth parts, more antennal segments and narrower body and
appendage segments.   Each  species is found predominantly In different habitats of the
spring area.

INDEX TERMS:  Aaphlpoda, Crustaceans, Ecology, Systematlcs, Speciation,  Texas, Aquatic
      habitats,  Invertebrates,  Aquatic animals, Classification, Animal populations,
      Water temperature, Hyalella texana, Hyallela azteca,  Clear Creek,  Arthropods,
      Animal morphology, Population  density,  Macroinvertebrates, Scuds.
                                                                                      32

-------
                                                                               2.   BIOLOGICAL METHODS
AHLC-7628
 "PHYSIOLOGICAL CHANGES  IN MfTIUUS EDUL1S L.
INDUCED BY TEMPERATURE AHD NUTRITIVE
STRESS", Bayne,  B.  L.,  Journal of the Marine Biological Association of the United
Kingdom, Vol.  53, No.  1, February 1973,  PP 39-58.

         The results of the determination of  oxygen consumption, nitrogen excretion
 (both ns aramonia-N  and alpha-anino-N) and of  the concentration of blood metabolites
 In ffytllus edulls are described In relation to seasonal cycle and to changes induced
 by temperature and  nutritive stress in the laboratory.   Four routine stress
 experiments were set up using 100 animals of  uniform length per experiment in
 aquaria with re-circulating seawater.  Three  levels of  oxygen consumption rate were
 identified, viz. standard,  routine and active.  Animals fed above the maintenance
 energy requirement  adjust their oxygen consumption rate to a routine level.   Animals
 fed below the maintenance requirement reduce  their oxygen consumption rate to a
 standard level within 35-1*0 days.  The routine rate Is  seasonally variable,  with high
 values in  the winter and low values In the summer.   The standard rate also varies
 seasonally.  The exponent that relates oxygen consumption to body size varies from a
 high value In the summer to a lower value in  the winter.  Rates of excretion of
 ammonia-N  and alpha-amlno-K vary seasonally from high values in winter to low values
 in summer.  Significant amounts of alpha-amino-N are lost from the body at all times,
 and especially during stress.   In unstressed  animals the atomic ratio of oxygen
consumed to anmonla-N excreted remains at about 10O for most of the year, but rises
to much higher values In the summer.   The relationship  observed in the 0:N values
under stress suggests that  the 0:N ratio Is a  sensitive Index of nutritive stress in
Ffrtllus.   Ctanges In blood  sugars were Interpreted  in terms of an Index of blod
sugar energy reserve,  which varies with stress.  Temperature and nutritive stress
AMJC-7626 (Continued)
                           Card 2/2
Is seen to alter seasonal  steady-state values of physiological  Indices.  New steady
states are established as  a result of stress, and the measured  shifts  in these
indices provide estimates  of the physiological effects of environmental change.

INDEX TERMS:  Thermal stress, Animal physiology, Laboratory  tests, Physiological ecology,
      Environmental effects, Nitrogen, Animal metabolism, Nutritive  stress, Seasonal
      variation, Oxygen consumption, Excretion.
AMC-7631
"THE ASSOCIATION OF AMPHIPODS IN THE SHALLOW-WATER SAND HABITAT OF STRANGFORD
LOUGH, CO. DOWN", Fincham, A. A., Journal of the Marine Biological Association
of the United Kingdom, Vol. 53, No. 1,  February 1973,  PP 119-125.

         Ten stations were sampled in the shallow-water sand habitat of Strangford
Lough using a naturalist's dredge.  Sediment samples were analyzed to determine
median diameter (ranging from 1.13 to 3-23 phi). Phi quartlle deviation (ranging
from 0.17 to 0.65 phi) and Phi quartile skewness (ranging from -0.11 to -O.OU  phi).
Twenty-two species of amphlpod belonging to thirteen families were identified; ten
species were new records for Strangford Lough and the Family Phoxocephalldae was
recorded for the first time.  The average number of species per station was nine and
average abundance was 660 amphipods per station.  The most frequently occurring
species was the caprellid Phtislca marina (present in 90 percent of the samples);  the
overall dominant species was the corophild Corophium crasslcorne representing  52
percent of all specimens recorded.  A matrix of indices of similarity between
stations based on species composition and of sediment type based on median diameter
showed a close correlation; in-faunal species showed a marked preference for
sediment type.  There were two main groupings:   (1) at the entrance to the Lough,
characterized by coarser sediments and rapid tidal streams and (2) stations further
in the Lough with finer sediments and more gentle water movement.   The evolution of
this amphipod fauna IB discussed and compared with the adjacent western Irish  Sea
shallow-water sand amphipod fauna.  Post-glacial Isolation and fine sediment
deposition have acted as selection pressures in maintaining the association of
amphipods found.
AMIC-7631 (Continued)
Card 2/2
                                              INDEX TERJ6:  Amphipoda, Shallow water, Systematics,  Speciation,  Crustaceans,  Benthlc
                                                    fauna, Dominant organisms, Sands, ferine habitats,  Strangford Lough, Beach fleas,
                                                    Ma.croinvertebrates, Arthropods.
                                                                                       33

-------
                                                                               2.  Bini.nCTr.AT.
AMIC-76U3
'felOMASS CHARACTERISTICS OF THE ASCIDIAM HOIGULA MAmATTEHSIS (lEKAY)", Hamilton,
D. H., Jr., Yurchyk, J,, Chesapeake Science, Vol. 1A, Ho. 1, March 1973, pp 67-68.

         Data are reported on wet weight, dry weight, ash-free dry weight, and
volume for i random cample of 101 Molgula for the purpose of simplifying future
calculations of its productivity.  The relationships were examined between the various
weight measures and betveen volume and weight by Unenr regression analysis.  The
average measurements were as follows  (range in parentheses): Volume,  5.26 cc  (0.67-11.56
cc); dry weight, 0.125 g (O.02-0.26 g); wet weight, 3.98 g (0.1*3-9.09 g); ash-free dry
weight, 0.05 g (o.Ql-0.09 g).  The correlation of volume with either  weight measure is
not strong and this is probably a consequence of assuming a spherical shape.  Each of
the weight measures is strongly correlated with the others (r greater than 0.90); in the
future measurement of wet weight alone vill penult rapid determination of blouses IB the
preferred units of ash-free dry weight.

INDEX TERMS:  Biomass, Biological properties. Invertebrates, Regression analysis, Volume,
      Marine aninals, Secondary productivity, Chemical analysis, Macroinvertebrates,
      Molgula nanhattensis, Tunlcates, Characterization, Linear regression analysis,
      Dry weight, Wet weight, Ash-free dry weight.
                                                                                            AMIC-767U
                                                                                            "DISPERSION, DISPERSAL, AMD PERSISTENCE OF THE AMSUAL IHTERTIDAL ALGA, POSTELSIA
                                                                                            PALMAEFORMIS HUPRECHT", Dayton,  P. K., Ecology. Vol. 51*, Ho. 2, Early Spring 1973,
                                                                                            PP
 AMIC-7672
 "TOE UTILIZATION OF LEAF LITTER BY STREAM DETRITIVORES", Cummin*, K. W., Perersen,
 R.  C., Howard, F. 0., Vfuycheck, J. C., Holt, V. I., Ecology. Vol. 5k, Mo. 2, Early
 Spring 1973, PP 336-3"»5.

          Investigations of large and fine particle feeding detrltivores (shredders
 and collectors) fed on conditioned hickory leaves (Carya glflbra) revealed
 density-dependent intra- and interspecific interactions.  Shredder (Tipula and
 pycnopsyche) growth rates ranged from 0.1*7 to 1.53 percent increase In bofly wt/day
 depending upon density,  species combinations, and culture temperature.  Collector
 (Stenonema)  growth rate ranged from 0.13  to 1.80 percent body wt/day, being greatest
 at high densities,  particularly in combination with shredders.  Food consumption ranged
 fronT 15 7 to 33.2 percent body vt/day for shredders and U.O to 23.2 percent body wt/day
 foTcollectors.   After non-shredder feeding losses are accounted for, estimated shredder
 standing  crop required to account for processing of reported leaf litter inputs compare
 Senerally to  measured shredder standing crop.

INDEX TERMS-   Animal  growth,  Mortality, Aquatic Insects, Laboratory tests, Natural
INDEX TERMS.   Ammaj.  gr^w  'ductlvltVj  Hickory trees, CaddlBflles, Stoneflies, Imature
                          •     Standing crops, Detritivorea, Leaf litter, Keterotrophle
                               anic matter,  Partlculate organic natter, Flies, Species
      density, Food conversion.
                                                                                                     Fostelsla palmaef orml s if  an annual brown alga  that occurs on the
                                                                                            Washington coast at upper Intertldal  sites subjected to  extreme wave exposure.  The
                                                                                            alga occurs in patches within beda  of Mytllus californlanus, the competitive dominant
                                                                                            in this region.   Postelsla sporophytes are shown to colonize experimentally cleared
                                                                                            spaces In beds of Mytllua with no concurrent colonization of adjacent uncleared controls,
                                                                                            However,  unlike many annual algae which have high spore  dispersal abilities, Postelsla
                                                                                            seems to have an effective distance of sporophyte colonization also.  Postelsia patches
                                                                                            are maintained through time by settlement of Postelsla on other algal and animal
                                                                                            species.   By increasing the probability of both being ripped from the substratum, and
                                                                                            by overgrowing and smothering barnacles, PoatelEia sporophytes clear primary substratum
                                                                                            for the eventual use of sporqphytes of their own species.

                                                                                            ITOEX TERMS:   Phaeophyta,  Intertldal  areas. Ecological distribution, Persistence,
                                                                                                  Dispersion,  Postelsia palmaef orml s, Colonization.
                                                                                          AMC-7702
                                                                                           "EFFECTS OF CHEMICAL VARIATIOHS OH AQUATIC EHVIBOMMSNT5.  VOLUME III.   LEAD TOXICIW
                                                                                          TO RAIHBOW TROUT AHD TESTING APPLICATION FACTOR CONCEPT", Davles, P. H., Everhart, W.  H.,
                                                                                          Colorado State University, Department of Fishery and Wildlife Biology,  Fort Collins,
                                                                                          Colorado, Report No. EPA J3-73-011c, February 1973, 80 pp.

                                                                                                   Acute and chronic bioassays were conducted with rainbow trout exposed to
                                                                                          various levels of  lead in hard water (alkalinity 2&3.1 ng/l) and soft  water (aUmllnity
                                                                                          26.U mg/1) to teat the application factor approach as related to different water
                                                                                          qualities.  Lead was added as lead nitrate.  Water was analyzed by atomic absorption
                                                                                          and pulse polarography and regularly monitored for various water quality parameters In
                                                                                          addition to lead concentration.  Fish were observed for growth and feeding rates and
                                                                                          were hematologically analyzed for hemoglobin, hematocrits, and plasma  proteins.   The
                                                                                          toxlcity of lead to rainbow trout in hard water was determine!} on a total and dissolved
                                                                                          lead basis.  The 96-hr TL sub 50 and maximum acceptable toxicant concentration 'MATC1  on
                                                                                          a total lead basis  were 471 mg/llter and 0.12 to 0.36 rag/liter respectively,  which
                                                                                          yielded an application factor of 0.0002 to 0.0008.   Analysis of the free or dissolved
                                                                                          lead gave a 96-hr TL sub 50 of 1.38 mg/liter and a  'MATC' of 0.018 to 0.032 rag/liter,
                                                                                          resulting In an application factor of 0.0130 to 0.0232.  Total *nfl free lead were
                                                                                          considered to be the sane in soft water.   The 18-clay TL sub 50 and 'MflTC1  obtained
                                                                                          from the soft water bioassays were ll»0 mlcrograms/liter and 6.0 to 11.9 nicrograms/liter
                                                                                          lead, respectively.  Computations using the TL sub  50 and 'MATC'  values gave  a soft
                                                                                          water application factor of 0.01*29 to 0.0850.   The  'MftTC1  was determined In both  hard
                                                                                          and soft water bioassays on the occurrence of abnormal black tails caused  by  chronic
                                                                                          lead exposure.   The application factor approach as  related  to different water qualities
                                                                                          was found to be very promising when lead  analysis was  limited to  the free  or dissolved
                                                                                          metal and failed when total hard water lead concentrations were used.

-------
                                                                                2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
  AMIC-T702  (Continued)
Card 2/2
  INDEX TEFMS:  Bioassay, Hardness (water), Alkalinity,  Water quality,  Toxiclty,  Flah
        reproduction, Rainbow trout, Lead, Atonic absorption spectrophotometry, Pulse
        pol»gainst
their means revealed greater deviation from the random expectation In the case of the 2
muddy sand stations than for the soft-mud stations, with only 1 exception.  Two tests
of goodness-of-flt to the Poisson distribution were also applied.  The degree of
concordance between the 3 measures of non-randomness applied was measured.  The best
correlation was found between values of the ratio of variance:  aean and the test
statistic D of the Kolmogorov-Smlrnov goodness-of-flt test.  It was not possible to
discuss the biological basis for the pattern measured,  except for a few species shown
to be markedly aggregated.   No clear trend emerged from attempts to detect differences
in pattern with various ecological groupings of the macrobenthos.  However,  from the
use of the test values as sample statistics Illustrative of overall community pattern,
it was possible to conclude that the fauna of the shallow, usually current-swept areas
of muddy sand in the sea-lochs Investigated was more aggregated than that on the,
usually deeper,  soft-mud sediments in quieter water.

INDEX TERMS:  Spatial distribution,  Benthos,  Biological  communities,  Benthlc fauna.
      Distribution patterns. Statistical methods.  Environmental  effects,  Data
      Interpretation,  Musroinvertebrates.
                   AMIC.772U
                   "SIMULATION STUDY OF PHYTOPLAHKTON PHOTOSYNTHESIS AND GROWTH IN THE FRASER RIVER
                   ESTUARY", Takahashl, M.,  Fujli,  K.,  Parsons, T. R., Marine Bollogy. Vol. 19, No. 2,
                   March 1973,  pp  102-U6.

                            Phytoplankton photosynthesis was estimated by a simulation model of the
                   Fraser River estuary (Canada).   For  this estimation, two kinds of information were
                   considered;  (l) the  photosyntbetlc response of phytoplankton taken from the estuary to
                   each  environmental factor;  (2) actual measurement of changes In each environmental
                   factor in the estuary.  As  the major limiting factors, light, intensity, temperature,
                   and nitrate  were taken into account.  Variations in these parameters were combined
                   together  under the assumption of the 'law of the minimum'; that is,  only one of the
                   environmental factors was considered to limit photosynthesis at any  given time and
                   place.  From the results obtained, it could be shown which environmental factors
                   actually  limited phytoplankton photosynthesis In the Tracer Fiver estuary at different
                   times  of  the year and at different depths

                   INDEX  TERMS:  Photosynthesis, Phytoplankton,  Plant growth,  Model studies,  Limiting
                         factors. Primary productivity, Estuarine environment,  On-site  investigations,
                         Light intensity, Water temperature,  Nitrates,  Saline  water-freshwater Interfaces,
                        Salinity,  Phosphorus, Fraser River.
                                                                                        35

-------
                                                                                 2.  BIOLOGICAL METHCDS
  AMIC-7720	~~T
  "ECOLOGICAL STUDIES OF CODtUM FRAGILE HJ NEW ENGLAND, USA", Frallelc, R. A., Jfcthieuon,
  A. C., Marine Biology, Vol. 197 No. 2, March 1973, PP 127-132.

 I          Eeciuse of the abundance of C odium fi^gl_l£  I Chlorophytq)  in New England
  ind Its economic Importance to  scallop Tad'oyliteFTiHiustrles, % study was made of the
 j factors responsible for its loci} grovth >»nd tllst.ribut.lon.  Systematic monthly
 i collections ind observnUcns of the algal populitions were made with SCUBA equipment
 , in the subllttoral zones «.t each site In Boothbay Harbor, Maine and In Woods Hole and
 : Wing Neck, Massachusetts.  Hesults of the various growth studies conducted were recorded
  monthly; hydrogrmphlc data were correlated  with the  grovth and reproductive studies.
 : It Is suggested that C. fragile is a warm-temperate  plant that Is  growing near its
 I northern limits in Hew England, but one that has not extended to its potential southern
  limits.

  INDEX TERMS:  Ecology, terlne alpie, Ecological distribution, Limiting factors, Plant
        physiology,  Photosynthesis,  M^lne, Massachusetts, Surface waters. Plant growth,
        Stranding crops,  Reproduction,  Codlum  fragile,  Seasonal variation.
 AMIC-7731
 "LASER  INDUCED  FLUORESCENCE IN ALGAE!  A NEW TECHNIQUE PDF REMOTE DETECTION",
 Friedman, E. J., Hlclonan, G. D.,  Sparcon, Incorporated,  Alexandria,  Virginia,
 Report No, NASA-CR_62090, Contract No.  HASS-2018,  October 1972,  106 pp.   BTIS Report
 No. N73-12527.

          Measurements of the absorption and fluorescence spectra were obtained for
 four types of marine and fresh water alga* using a pulsed N2/Ne  dye  laser aa  the  source
 Of excitation.  The algs« Investigated  were Agmenellum,  Chlorella, ChlamydomonaA,  and
 Porphyrldiuni.  The absorption  maxima for the algae ranged from U20 to 675 nm  while
 their fluorescent spectra ranged  from 580 to 695 nm.   It appears feasible that various
 algal opecles can be identified by  detection of their fluorescent signatures  using a
 tunable  laser as the excitation source.   However,  if  one Is concerned only with
 letectlon of chlorophyll a, the optimum excitation Is approximately  600  plus  or minus
 50 nm while  detection 18 at 685 nm.  An analysis of both calculations and laboratory
 results  Indicates that Is should be feasible  to measure  chlorophyll  a In concentrations
S.B low a» 1.0 mg/cu m using a 100 kw peat pulsed laser from an altitude  of 500 meters.

 NDEX  TERMS:  Remote sensing. Absorption* Fluorescence,  Pigmenta, Pollutant
       identification, Chlorophyll a, L&Ber-exelted  fluorescence,  Porpbyrldium.
AMIC-TT32
 "AH M SITU EVALUATION OF MUTRIEHT EFFECTS IB LAKES", Jordan, R. A., Bender, M. E.,
Virginia  Institute of Marine Science, Gloucester Point, Virginia, Report No.
EPA-R3-73-018, April 1973,  237 pp.

          A method for performing  in  situ nutrient enrichment experiments on natural
 lake phyUjpldnXton communities was developed and evaluated.  Cr>e set or experiments
 In which  it was  employed was designed to detect limiting nutrients ind to provide &
basis tor predicting future experiment results.  Productivity Jncre^.std In response
to all three  of  the  treatment  variables used, N, P, and EDTA, but response pittcrns
varied from experiment to experiment.  Individual species responded differently to
different treatments, and interactions among the treatment variables were important
in shaping the conaunlty responses to mixtures of two or three variables.  The most
consistent features  of the  productivity results were incorporated Into a "most
probable  response pattern," which was partially validat.sd by a second series of
experiments.  Tlie second experiment  series was also used to test the ability of NTA
to stimulate phytoplankton  j-.roductlvlty.  Stimulation vas continually obtained.  In
a  third series of experiments  sewage effluents were tested In parsllel with N ind P.
Varying degrees of overlap  between the species complexes responding to the sewage and
to the H  and P treatments were found.  Recommendations for the use of in situ
enrichment experiments in eutrophlcatlon studies are presented.

INDEX TEHMSi  Limiting factors, Nutrients,  On-slte investigations,  Nitrates,
       Hltrilotrlacetlc acid, Sewage effluents,  Bloassay, Growth rates, Chlorophytft,
                  Chrysophyta, Pyrrophyta,  Phosphates,  EDTA,  Cryptononads.
AMIC-7752
"PHOSPHATE CHEMISTKf IN LAKE SEDIMENTS", Syers, J. K., Harris,  S.  F.,  Armstrong,
D. E., Journal of Environmental Quality. Vol. 2, Bo. 1,  Jinuary-March  19?3»  PP 1-1'*-

         The amounts and forms of Inorganic and organic phosphate  (P)  In lake
sediments are dietufl»*d In relation to sediment composition UK) properties.   The
ability of noncalcareous and calcareous sediments to sorb and desert added P in tAe
laboratory and in the lake environment is Interpreted tn terms  of  the  amounts and
reactivities of sediment components Involved In the sorptlon of P; emphasis  is placed
on the role of an Fe-rich gel complex.  Factors controlling the chemical mobility and
biological availability of sediment inorganic and organic F are considered.   Whether
sediments act as a P source or sink Is determined by sediment composition and
llmnological conditions.  The factors involved in the interchange  of P between the
sediment Interstitial water and the overlying water column are  reviewed.  The role
of P In lake eutrophication Is discussed briefly.

INDEX TERMS:  Phosphates, Reviews,  Lake sediments,  Sorptlon, Eutrophication,  Solubility,
      Mineralogy, Algae, Oxidation-reduction potential, Cycling nutrients, Sediment-
      water Interfaces,  Nutrient interchange, Deaorption, Chemical mobility.

-------
                                                                                 2.  BIOLnCTCAT. MFTHnns
  AMIC-7753
  "THE NITROGEN CYCLE IB SEDIteNT-WATER SYEIQe", Keeney, D. R., Journal of
  Environmental Quality. Vol. 2, No. 1, January-March 1973, PP 15-29.

           The available literature on the fate of nitrogen In waters and sediments Is
  reviewed.  Emphasis Is placed on the Importance of N to aquatic productivity, the
  pathways leading to K gains or losses in aquatic ecosystems, and the availability of
  K in sediments to the overlying waters.  Important biological reactions Include H
  mineralization and immobilization, nitrification and denltrlfication, and V fixation.
 ! The effect of sediment properties, lake morphology and environmental factors (pH,
  temperature, dissolved oxygen, oxidation-reduction) on the pathways and rates of N
 I turnover are considered.  The mixing process in sediments appear to be the most
 | important In releasing sediment JJ to waters.  Several facets of the N cycle In waters
 ! and sedljnents require further elucidation.  Research needs are outlined.

 | INDEX TERMS:  Reviews, Aquatic productivity, Sediment-water interfaces,  Nitrogen cycle,
        Eutrophlcatlon,  Environmental effects, Cycling nutrient.  Nitrification, Denltrlfl-
 I       cation, Nitrogen fixation,  Water quality,  Ecosystems,  Algae,  Bacteria,
        Ml
 AMIC-7T55
  tyUfflOH CYCLE IN SEDIMENT-HATER SYSTEMS", Kerr, P. C., Broekway, D. L., Paris, D. F.,
 Craven, S. E., Journal of Environmental Quality, Vol. 2, No. 1, January/March 1973,
 PP U6-52.

          This paper reviews literature relevant to the extent and rate of carbon
 exchange between  sediment and water and discusses the general implication of the role
 of carbon in regulating biological activity.  Several conclusions are drawn from the
 review.  The extent of adsorption of oracles to clay minerals In natural aquatic
 ecosystems Is not Known.  Sorptlon, desorptlon, sedimentation, and aerobic and anaerobic
 activity are affected by physical factors such as depth and mixing.  Certain data
 Indicate that organisms cannot utilize organic material sorbed to clay minerals)  other
 data Indicate that growth of certain bacteria and yeast is stimulated by the addition of
 clay minerals.  Although the exact (ubstrate(s) Is not known,  aerobic and anaerobic
 decomposition of organic materials occurs In and on sediments.  Aerobic decomposition
 seems to result in three different reactions affecting sediment-water carbon exchange:
 (1) Methane gas is produced and released from sediments.   (2)  Organic acids produced by
 anaerobes can serve as carbon sources for aerobes as well as aiding In solublllzntlon    I
| of carbonates and affecting sorptlve processes.   (3)  Carbon dioxide produced by anaerobe*!
 nay be combined in some manner and remain in the sediments.  The fact that most deep
 sediments retain organic carbon Indicates that sediments  may be sinks for organlcs.
 Possibly sediments serve as organic carbon sinks simply because the rate of sedimentation
 exceeds the rate of decomposition.

 INDEX 1ERMS:   Reviews, Carbon cycle,  Aquatic environment.  Sediment-water Interfaces,
       Aquatic microorganisms,  Carbon dioxide,  Sinks,  Ecosystems,  Nutrient Interchange.
 AMK-7751*
 "FESTIdEE-SEDIMENT-WATER INTERACTIONS", Plonke,  H. B., Chesters, G.f Journal of
 Environmental Quality,  Vol.  2, »o. 1, January/March 1973, PP 29-^5.
           Pesticlde-sedlment-water interactions occurring within a watershed and the
 associated aquatic system are reviewed regarding their impact on the distribution and
 persistence  of pesticides in recipient lakes.   Pesticidal persistence on the watershed
 is discussed Initially because the aquatic residue hazard depends largely on the
 persistence  of soil-applied pesticides.  Mechanisms of transport from field to aquatic
 system are reviewed for those compounds not degraded rapidly to nontoxic derivatives.
 Pesticide transport through the atmosphere,  ground water, and surface runoff is traced
 with particular emphasis on application-associated losses and transport effect on initial
 pesticide distribution and concentration in the aquatic system.  Field and plot studies
 evaluating pesticide losses in runoff are summarized.  Within the aquatic system,
               sediment  and water characteristics potentially alter the distribution of
               cide between water and associated sediment within the lake.  Speeificially,
     effects  of t>H  lake  stratification,  characteristics and content of sediment organic
        and clay  and salinity  are evaluated.   This review concludes with a discussion of
           on Desticlde persistence determined in simulated or natural aquatic systems
           .erections between aquatic vegetation,  sediment and water which affect
pesticide  distribution.

TNDEX TERMS-   Watersheds (divides).  Reviews, Sediments, Watersheds (basins). Pesticide
INDEX j^jcs^^^envlronmeni. Water quality,  Groundvater movement. Persistence,
      Pesticide residues,
      Soil contai
      Envlronmen
  Amiatlc  environment, water quality, M^«!»•*»<*-=* «~.~-«-«-,  .-..-.*-™«.w,
'* C^«1 flues  Surface runoff, Adsorption, Degradation (decomposition).

Ifeff^ed^^
 AffiC-7762
 "PHYSICO-CHEMICAL LMKJLOGY AHD PERIPHYTON IN A WARM-WATER STREAM RECEIVING WASTEWATER
 TREATMENT PLANT EFFLUEHT", Brtgham, A. R., Larifflore,  R. W., University of  Illinois,
 Water Resources Center, Urbana, Illinois,  WRC Research Report No. 59, Contract No.
 DI-lU-31-0001-3513, September 1972, 83 pp.  HTIS Report No. PB-213 501.

          Physical, chemical and biological parameters were monitored at five stations
 in the Asa Creek-Kaskaskia River system, Moultrie County,  Illinois, from 12 September
 1969 through 7 September 1970 to characterize these streams as a perlphyton habitat.
 December 1970 to determine the effect of the effluent from the Sullivan wastewater
 treatment plant on assimilation of dissolved organic  matter by the periphyton community.
 The results of 3"* parameters measured biweekly revealed that there was no gross evidence
 of any differences between the creek and river sampling sites as determined by these
 measurements.  Only nitrate-nitrogen,  ammonia-nitrogen, and phosphorus (all forms)
 concentrations were directly attributable  to the  effluent  in Asa Creek,  the receiving
 stream.   Of eight parameters measured during the  periphyton accrual study,  four were
 found to be significantly different among  stations.  These included standing crop
 (blonass),  organic content,  and productivities (blomass and caloric value).  Intrastatlon
 correlations among these parameters revealed  that the discharge of effluent Into Asa
 Creek coupled with Aaa Creek's low stream order not only resulted in a wide flux of
 physico-chemical conditions,  but also  had a varied effect on the periphyton.  Greater
 stability In the Kaskaskia River,  a higher order stream,  was reflected in more
 predictable levels of physico-chemical parameters and In more stable periphyton
 communities which developed there.   Planktonlc and periphytlc bacterial  chemo-
 organotrophy,  with acetate as the  substrate, were measured and  evaluated through enzyme
 kinetics analysis procedures.  Bacterial uptake kinetics  experiments demonstrated that
                                                                                        37

-------
                                                                                2.  Bira.nmr.AT
  AMIC-7762 (Continued)
Card 2/2
  the peripbyton, at stations Influenced by the wastewater treatment plant effluent,
  assimilated two to three times more dissolved organic matter than at stations not
  Influenced by the effluent.  The Influence of the treatment plant was not as apparent
  for assimilation by plp-nktontc bacteria.  This reinforced the premise that the attached
  community was the nest sensitive to subtle changes In the aquatic environment.

  INDEX TERMS:  Periphyton, Water pollution effects, Biolndlcators, Nutrients, Absorption,
        Bacteria, Organic natter, Waste water (pollution). Sewage effluents,  Kinetics,
        Water quality,  Correlation analysis. Regression analysis, Asa Creek Kaskaskla
        River.
 AMZC-776T
  "FLOW OF MICROBIALLY  FIXED NITROGEN IN A  MDDEL ECOSYSTEM",  Vlsser,  S. A., Wltkanp,
 M., Dahlman, R. C., Plant and Sola, Vol.  38, No. 1,  February 1973,  pp 1-8.

           Transfer  of  atmospheric nitrogen through mlcroblal fixers, a green plant,
 decomposer mlcroflora, water and soil  was measured In model ecosystems.  The systems
 were maintained under controlled conditions in a 50-ml  resplrometer fla»k and consisted
 of 10 g  of kaollnlte, 10 ml of water,  60  duckweed leaves  (Leona minor), and a mixed
 mlcroflora or pure Azotobacter chroococcum.  The role of  the Azotobacter In fixation
 was assessed by comparing  the  nitrogen flow In systems  with nitrogen fixers only and
 those with both nitrogen fixers  and decomposers.  Analog  computer simulations were
 used to compare N-15 transfer  from  the atmosphere with  net  changes of all nitrogen in
 ,11  compartments.   Results  showed that Azotobacter and  the  mixed flora with
 Azotobacter are about equally  capable  of  fixing atmospheric nitrogen.  During subsequent
 transfer of the nitrogen there was a distinct  differentiation between movement of the
 newly fixed nitrogen and the nitrogen  that was already  present in tissues Introduced in
 the beginning of the experiment.   Pathways and transfer coefficients of both N-lU and
N-15 were different in the presence of the different microbial populations.  Turnover
was more  complex and in general slower In the presence  of a mixed population than_with
pure Azotobacter.   Denltrificatlon losses upon acidification were negligible for H-1U
 mt appreciable for B-15.
 NDEX TERMS:  Nitrogen fixation,  Azotobacter,  Nitrogen  fixing bacteria, Path of pollu-
      tants. Nitrification, Ecosystems, Mass spectrometry.  Computer models, Cycling
      nutrients, Fate  of pollutants, Culturlng techniques.
                                                                                                                                                       Wolk, C. P., Bacteriological
AMK-7765
"PHYSIOLOGY AND CYTOLOGICAL CHQOSTRf OF BLUE-GREEN ALGAE"
Reviews. Vol. 37, No, 1, March 1973, PP 32-101.

         That information which is pertinent to the study of the  developmental
phenomena of blue-green algae has been expanded to encompass that which  Is known of
their physiology and cytological chemistry.   This review paper covers the latter two
areas of interest.

INDEX TERMS:  Plant physiology, Cyanophyta,  Algae, Chotosynthesis, Respiration,  Plant
      morphology, Photosynthesis, Biological properties,  Nitrogen fixation. Genetics,
      Plant pigments, Proteins, Carbohydrates,  Lipids,  Metabolism, Algal toxins, Nutrlen'
      requirements. Nitrogen compounds.  Algal growth. Biochemical properties,
      Cyanophages, infrastructure,  Biosynthesis,  Substrate utilization, Synchronous
      cultures,  Pure cultures,  Culturlng techniques, Electron transport.
                   AHIC-7783
                   "A MATJEWTICAL MODEL OF THE NUTRIENT DYNAMICS OF  PHYTOPLANKTON IN A NITRATE-LIMITED
                   ENYIRONMSM",  Grenney, W. J., Bella,  D. A., Curl,  H. C., Jr., Biotechnology and
                   Bloengineering.  Vol.  15, »o. 2,  March 1973, PP 331-358.
                            A three-compartment mathematical model is presented that represents a
                   phytoplankton population capable of storing nitrogen In a nitrate-limiting environment.
                   Growth rates are represented by saturation kinetics based on the concentrations In
                   intracellular nutrient pools.  Nutrient flow through a biological system Is described
                   using three forms of Intracellular  nitrogen (inorganic-nitrogen, organic Intermediates,
                   and protein).  The three-compartment model was developed as part of a larger model to
                   Investigate mechanisms associated with nutrient limitation and recycling.   The model
                   demonstrated the changes which may  occur in the nitrogenous constituents of a
                   phytoplankton population with time  and environmental conditions.  The model also
                   demonstrates three phenomena which  have been observed in field and laboratory experiments
                   but which are not represented by the customary Monod model:  (1) uptake rates may
                   significantly exceed net growth rates, (2) high grovth rates may be encountered at very
                   low environmental nitrate concentrations, and (3) the ratio of Internal nitrogen to
                   population size may change significantly during a study period.   It is suggested that the
                   amount of nitrogen In storage may be used as an indicator of the physiological state of a
                   monospeclflc population.   The one-compartment Monod model was shown to be  inadequate to
                   accurately represent population growth in chemostat experiments  when intracellular
                   storage Is a significant factor.

                   INDEX TERMS:   Phytoplankton,  Mathematical models,  Nitrates,  Cycling nutrients, Deficient
                         elements,  Computer models, Absorption, Grovth rates,  Proteins,  Nitrogen, Storage,
                         Kinetics,  Monod model, Chemostat.

-------
                                                                                2.   BIOLOGICAL METHODS
 AMC-7859
  "EFFECTS OF PESTICIDES  IH WA1EP",  U.  S. Environmental  Protection Agency, Washington,
 D.C.,  EPA Report to the States  (No Date),  ll»5 pp.

           This  document  was  prepared to fulfill  the  requirement of the newly
 amended Federal Water Pollution Control Act.  The scientific  Information contained
  in this document consists of current  knowledge  of the  effects on health and
 velfare of the presence of  pesticides in waters.  The  areas covered are:   (l)
 behavior of pesticides  in the environment, (2)  lethality,  (3) persistence  and
 •biological accumulation, and (It) residues.

 INDEX  TERMS:   Water pollution effects, Pesticide kinetics, Persistence, Pesticide
        toxicity.  Pesticide residues. Aquatic life, Bioaasay, Lethal  limit.  Heavy metals,
        Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides, Organophosphorus pesticides, Freshwater fish.
        Path of pollutants, Metal  organic pesticides, Aquatic bacteria, Aquatic plants,
        Marine fish,  Plant tissues, Trlazlne pesticides. Insecticides, Herbicides,
        Fungicides, Carbanate pesticides, Urea pesticides, Arsenicals  (pesticides),
        Phenolic pesticides, Plsclcldes, Marine algae, Aquatic algae, Mu-ine plants.
       Food chains, Bioaccumulatlon, Metabolites, Animal tissues.
                                                                                         T
 AMIC-7893
 "BEHAVIOR OF THE GOLDFISH AS AN EARLY WARNING S1STSM FDR USE PRESENCE OF POLLUTANTS
 IN WATER", Salzlnger, K., Falrhurst, S. P., Frelmrk, S. J., Wolkoff. F. D.,
 Journal of Environmental Systems, Vol. 3, No. 1, Spring 1973, PP 27-W.

          This paper has a twofold purpose.  First, It reviews the literature on the
 effects of pollutants on fish, particularly goldfish. In terns of lethal dosage and
 behavioral changes.  Second, It presents the results of an experiment showing the
 effects of two very low concentrations of mercury on the behavior of goldfish.
 Twelve goldfish were conditioned to form different behavior patterns to obtain food
 (three fish to each pattern).  After stabilisation of these patterns, one fish from
 each pattern was placed In mercury polluted water at a concentration of 0.01 ppm,  one
 In water polluted at O.OCo ppm, and the third In unpolluted water.  All four fish placed
 in the more highly polluted water showed the largest drop in response rate.   All but
 one  of the  fish placed In the lower-concentration polluted water showed greater
 decrease In response than those In the unpolluted water.  The results suggest that
 the  goldfish might be a potential pollution monitor.

INDEX TERMS:  Pollutant Identification,  Blolndlcators, Fish behavior, Water  pollution.
      Mercury, Lethal limit.  Water pollution effects, Toxlclty,  Reviews,  Hydrogen Ion
      concentration,  Salinity,  Water temperature, Pesticides, Heavy metals.  Alkali
      metals. Goldfish, Carasslus  auratus,  Biomonltorlng.
                                                                                       39
  AMIC-7915
  "PHYTOPIABRPDN AUQAE:   HUTMENT COSCEHTRATIOHS AND GROWTH"  Holmes, P., Kelly, M. G.,
  Hornberger, G. M.,  O'Brien,  W.  J., Science. Vol. 180, No. U092, June 1973, pp 1298-1300

           Critiques  of  and a  rebuttal  to in article concerned with nutrients and
  growth of phytoplanfcton are  presented.  Some of the more pertinent points made include:
  (l)  Growth yield  depends on  the concentration of i limiting nutrient and not necessarily
  on how fast growth  can occur.   (2) Considering Monod kinetics, nutrient addition will
  increase both  growth rate and final biomass.  Phytoplankton growth kinetics should be
  considered in  terms of both  standing  crop and productivity, nutrient uptake or growth
  rate.   (3) The Lleblg  thought of nutrient limitation In terms of enhanced yield and
  experiments which demonstrate only an enhancement of phytoplankton yield without
  showing a change  In population  growth rate are not always valid in determining a real
  limiting factor In  the natural  system.
  INDEX TERMS:  Phytoplankton, Growth rates,
       limiting factors, Growth kinetics.
Primry productivity,  Nutrient requirements,
 AMIC-7922
 "STANDARD DISPERSANT EFFECTIVENESS AND TOXICITY  TESTS",  McCarthy, L. T., Jr., Wilder,  I.
 Dorrler,  J.  S.,  U.  S. Environmental Protection Agency, Edison Water Quality Research
 Laboratory,  Edison, New Jersey,  Report No.  EPA-R2-73-201, May 1973, 66 pp.

         A brief history of  the development of the Standard EPA Dispersant
Effectiveness and Toxlclty tests Is  outlined.  The standard tests are presented and
discussed.  An analysis  of variance  Is performed on the data developed by three
independent laboratories In  order to determine the reproduclblllty of standard test
procedures.  In the standard effectiveness test, oil Is applied to the water surface
In a cylindrical tank.   Dispersant is applied  in a fine stream and then mixing energy
is supplied by a pressurized water stream.  The tank contents are recirculated after
which samples are withdrawn  for extraction and spectrophotometric analysis.   The
standard tox^eity test Involves exposing three species (Plmephales promelas,  Fundulus
beteroclltus, and Artemla mllnn) to dispersant and oil/dlspersant mixtures.   From
these tests a curve relating organism survival to material concentrations is  developed
to determine median tolerance limits.  Separate discussion sections Include the
statistical analyses of  'testing the test1 results for reproduclblllty and the
rationale for selecting the test procedures as presented.

INDEX TERMS:   Testing procedures,  Toxicity,  Laboratory tests, Methodology, Bioassay, Fish
      Brine shrimp,  Statistical methods.  Freshwater, Sea water, Lethal limit, Oil
      dispersants,  Standard tests,  Reproducibility, Median tolerance limit, Data
      interpretation.

-------
                                                                                2.   BIOLOGICAL METHODS
 AKtC-7929
 "A RELATIONSHIP BETVffiN HETEROTHOPHIC UTILIZATION OF ORGANIC ACIDS AM) BACTERIAL
 POPULATIONS  IK WEST BLUE  LAKE, MANITOBA, Robinson, C. G. C., Hendzel, L. L.,
 Gillesple, D. C.,  Limnology and Oceanography, Vol. 18, No. 2, March 1973, pp 26U-269.
|
i           The relationship between the concentration of nine or&uilc acid substrates
! (lactic,  pyruvlc,  funarlc, malic,  acetic,  succinic, glycolic, citric, and formic)
! and  their velocities  of uptake have  been Investigated in West Blue Lake, Manitoba.
 Maximum uptake velocities were ranked and  compered with bacterial plate counts on
 minimal media supplemented with single  organic acids.  Water samples from a 5-*i depth
' were screened through a 153-rcicron Nltex screen to remove nost of the zooplanktcB.
j Subsanples were placed in nn appropriate number of sterile 25-oil bottles and
I Inoculated with the C-lt-labeled organic acid substrates.  All bottles were Incubated In
 the lake  for a 12-hr  period at a depth  of  5 m.  After Incubation the samples were
i filtered  through 0.^5-mlcron cellulose  acetate filters each of which was washed with
j sterile water and placed  into scintillation vials containing Bray's fluor.
 Radioactivity was determined In n  scintillation counter and calculations were made to
i determine bacterial numbers In relation to each organic acid.  For pyruvic, fumaric,
| malic, acetic, glycolic,  and citric acids an excellent correlation (r equals 0.98)
 existed between plate counts and acid uptake indicating that for these substrates
 maximum velocities of uptake are Indeed indicative of actual bacterial populations.

 INDEX TERMS:   Organic acids,  Aquatic bacteria,  Absorption,  Organic compounds,  Water sam-
       sanpling.  Cultures,  Substrate utilization.  Heterotrophic nutrition, Heterotrophlc
       bacteria,  Bacterial populations, West Blue  Lake, Data interpretation,  Plate
       counts.
 AMIC-7931
 "ANNUAL PRODUCTION OF A STREAM MAYFLY POPULATION:  A COMPARISON OF METHODS;1,
 Waters, T. F., Crawford, 0. W., Limnology and Oceanography. Vol. 18, No. 2, March 1973,
 pp 286-296.

          The annual production of the mayfly Ephemerella subvaria McDunnough In a small
 central Minnesota stream, Luxemburg Creek, was  estimated by four methods:  a
 renoval-sumnatlon method, the  instantaneous  growth method, the Allen curve, and the
 Hynes method.  Basic data on standing crop and  growth  rates were obtained from  a
 series of bottom samples covering the life cycle of the  mayfly.  H>e life history of
 E.  subvaria was clear and simple,  and the data  were particularly amenable to production
 estlmation~by all four methods.   The first three yielded estimates of annual production
 that generally agreed, ranging from 26.U to  28.9 g/sq  m.  The Hynes  method yielded an
 estimate  15.2 to 26.1 percent higher, or 33.3 g/sq m.  Cohort turnover ratios for the
 first three methods ranged from I*.2  to k.6 (not calculable for the Hynes method);
 the  annual turnover ratio for the  first three methods  ranged from 5.8 to 6.3 and was
7.2  for the Hynes method.  (Reprinted from Limnology and Oceanography. Vol. 18,
No.  2.  March 1973,  pp 286-296.  Copyright 1973 by the American Society of Limnology
and  Oceanography, Inc.   Reprinted by permission of the copyright owner.)

INDEX TERMS:  Mayflies,  Standing crops,  Secondary  productivity. Animal growth,
      Methodology, Growth rates,  Bottom sampling,  Aquatic Insects, Annual, Life history
      studies. Annual turnover, Comparative studies, Removal summation method,
     ; Instantaneous growth method, Allen curve method, Hynes method, Method evaluation,
      Data interpretation, Ephemerella subvaria.
 AMC-7932
 "ESTIMATION OF MORBOITSf CCEFFICDMTS FROM FIELD SAMPLES OF ZOOPIAHKTOH",  Fager,  E. W.,
 Limnology and Oceanography, Vol. 18, No. 2, March 1973, PP 297-301.

          Point estimates of mortality of zoopl&nkton In the field, based on relative
 numbers of Individuals of different developmental stages observed In samples,  require
 either a knowledge of the Initial input of young or assumptions about constancy of
 input and constancy of mortality over adjacent stages.   As the initial input is rarely
 known and the assumptions of constancy are probably often violated,  the resulting
 uncertainty should be Bade evident in the estimates.  This can be done by  reporting
 the ranges of values of the mortality coefficients that would be consistent with  the
 observed relative numbers of Individuals.  Methods of calculating these ranges are
 given.  (Reprinted from Limnology and Oceanography. Vol. 18, No.  2.   March 1973,
 pp 297-301.  Copyright 1973 by the American society of Limnology and Oceanography,
 Inc.  Reprinted by permission of the copyright owner.)

 INDEX TEFM5:   Zooplankton,  On-site data collections, Estimating,  Computer  programs,
       Animal  populations, Mathematical studies,  Mortality  coefficients,  Population
       dynamics.
 AMIC-7935
 "AN EVALUATION OF LIQUID SCINTILLATION COUNTING TECHNIQUES FOR USE IN AQUATIC PRIMARY
 PRODUCTION STUDIES", Pugh,  P. R., Limnology and Oceanography. Vol. 18, No. 2, March
 1973,  PP  310-319.

          Methods  evaluated  for the liquid scintillation counting of samples from
 aquatic primary production  studies Include the counting of intact filters and cells in a
 toluene fluor, solublllzatlon and counting of membrane filters and cells in various
 reagents, and counting of a suspension of cells mixed with the fluor.   A 1:1 Triton
 X-100:toluene fluor was very effective for the suspension of cells and ^ve high counting
 efficiencies.  Up to 5 ml of sample could be mixed with the fluor, but this was  con-
 sidered Inadequate for most primary production studies.  The filter standardization
 method for the counting of  intact filters was investigated further and found to  be  appli-
 cable over a wide range of conditions but only accurate when the weight of algae on the
 filters was small (less than 1 mg).   Direct solublllzatlon of the  filters and cells in a
 naphthalene-dloxane or 2-methoxyethanol-toluene fluor were the simplest,  most accurate,
 and economical methods for primary production studies; the latter  dissolved both wet and
dry cellulose nitrate membrane filters and gave excellent  replicate counting.  (Reprinted
 from Limnology and Oceanography.  Vol.  18,  No.  2, March 1973,  PP 310-319-  Copyright 1973
 yy the American Society of Limnology and  Oceanography,  Inc.   Reprinted by permission of
the copyright owner.)

 INDEX TERMS:   Evaluation, Primary productivity. Methodology, Radioactivity techniques,
      Aquatic environment. Liquid scintillation, Scintillation counting, Membrane
      filters. Accuracy,  Reagents.
                                                                                       1*0

-------
                                                                                2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
  AMIC-7936
  "MSMBRAHE FILTER RETENTION-A SOURCE OF EHROF IH 1HE C-lU H5THQD OF HBASURIM3
  PRIMARY PRODUCTION", MeMahon, J. W., Limnology and Oceanography. Vol. 18, Bo. £, tfcrch
  1973, pp 319-32"*.

           The relationship between volume of water filtered and apparent specific
 1 activity of phytoplankton In which the latter decreases (cpm C-lU/ml) with Increasing
 ! volume filtered, previously attributed to cellular damage to phytoplankton during
 i vacuum filtration. Is now considered mainly due to retention at unfixed radlotracer
 ' on the membrane filter.  The retention capacity for C-lA toy the filter, expressed
 ! as radioactivity per mllliliter filtered. Is maximum for email sample volumes
  (less than or equal to 1 ml), decreasing to a constant value when sample volumes are
  larger than 100 ml.  Ibis is attributed partially to adsorption In the filter aid
  probable retention of C-lU bound to unknown substances In the water or on the filter
  which are eluted or exchanged by passage of volumes of water of 100 ml or greater.
  This "washing" effect permits almost oil of the C-lU not fixed in organisms to pass
  through the filter.  (Reprinted from Limnology and Oceanography.  Vol. 16,  Ho.  2.  torch
  1973, PP 319-32I*.   Copyright  1973 by the^American Society of Limnology and Oceanography,
  Inc.  Reprinted by  permission  of the copyright owner.)

  INDEX TERMS:   Primary productivity,  Methodology, Water analysis,  Radioactivity techniques
        Retention, Measurement,  Phytoplankton,  Volume,  Carbon radloisotopes.  Absorption,
        Chemical analysis,  Membrane filters,  Error sources.  Liquid  scintillation.
        Scintillation counting, C-lU,  Asterlonella formosa,  Maskinonge Lake,  Grenadier
        Pond.
 AMTC-7938                                                                        —
 "SUGAR-COATED DAPHHIA:  A PRESERVATION TECHNIQUE FOF CLADOCERA",  Haney,  J.  F.,  Hall,
 D. J., Limnology and Oceanography , Vol. 18,  So. 2, March 1973, PP 331-333.

          A simple preservation technique Is described which utilizes sucrose to prevent
 carapace distortion and loss of broodpouch contents due to ballooning In C°phnla.
 Zooplankton samples collected from Little Mill Lake by vertical tows of  *. 75-micron-mesh
 plankton net through 9 m vere transferred to a 75-micron Nltex screen glued to  the
 bottom of en acrylic cylinder, Imneraed in carbonated water,  washed into sijuple bottles
 containing appropriate concentrations of sucrose and U percent formalin.  Carapace
 distortion and loss of eggs by preserved specimens were prevented by adding l*o  g/llter
 sucrose to l> percent formalin.  Differences in size and species composition nay
 Influence the threshold sugar concentration at which ballooning is prevented.

 INDEX TERMS:   Daphnla,  Methodology,  Sample preservation,  Sucrose,  Zooplankton,
       Invertebrates,  Macrolnvertebrates,  tfephnla pulex, Daphnla galeata.
 AMIC-7937
 "THE REDUCTION OF COPPER TOXICITY IN A MARINE COPEPOD BY SEDIMENT EXTRACT", Levis, A. G.,
 Whitfield, P., Ramnarin*, A., Limnology and Oceanography, Vol. 18, No. 2, March 1973,
 pp 32^-326.

          Seawater extracts of marine sediments from two areas were added to
 copper-enriched seawater in which the prefceding stages (egg, HI, Nil) of Euchaeta
 laponlca (CopepodaiCalanoida} vere maintained.  Sediment samples were collected with
 an Ekman and a Shipek sampler.  A quantity of the sediment was extracted by allowing the
 sediment to stand in cold,  membrane-filtered seawater.  The extract was filtered, stored,
 lluted to 2 percent, and CuC12 and the prefeeding copepod stages were added.   Survival
 .hrough the prefeeding stages was used as an indication of the effects of the  sediment
 xtracts.   Survival  with the sediment extracts was greater than without, indicating an
 blllty of  some part of the extracted material to reduce the toxlcity of the copper.
The effect  of the extracts  was compared with that of a synthetic chelatlng agent to
 rovlde an  'equivalent1  value.

 NDEX TERMS:  Copper, Toxlcity,  Copepods,  Attenuation, Bottom sediments, Hater pollution
      effects. Growth stages, Euchaeta Japonic*,  Survival.
AMIC-7939
 "QUANTITATIVE SAMPLING OF LIVE 2COPLANKTON WITH A FILTER-PUMP SYSTEM", Icanberry, J.  W.,
Richardson, R. W., Limnology and Oceanography. Vol. 18, No.  2, March 1973, PP 333-335.

         A conventional plankton net was Inadequate for study of the survival of
zooplankton passing through the cooling water systems of thermal power plants.   A filter
collection system was designed which allows survivals of 90-95 percent by reducing water
velocities and turbulence within the collection chamber.   The filter-pump system
consisted of a specially designed filter connected to a Labawco type P general purpose
centrifugal pump driven by an electric motor.   Comparisons of fishing abilities  did not
show any significant differences between a filter pump and a plankton net.

INDEX TERMS:  Zooplankton,  Equipment, Efficiencies,  Plankton nets, Methodology,
      Construction, Water sampling,  Filtration,  Mortality, Filter-pump system,
      Quantitative sampling,  Performance evaluation. Survival.

-------
                                                                               2.   BIOLOGICAL METHODS
"IDEHTIFICATIOB OF 1BE LIMITING NUTRIENT AHD SPECIFIC GROWTH RATE", Sykes, R. M.,
Journal Water Pollution Control Federation. Vol. U5, Ho. 5, May 1973, pp 888-895.

         The simplest mathematical theory of continuous microbial cultures, that for
the chemostat, contains the corollary that a given growth medium may contain more
than one limiting nutrient.  If it does, in chemostat cultures each nutrient is
limiting in a different, nonoverlaping dilution rate range, and in batch cultures
each nutrient limits in different growth stages.  It Is possible to derive from the
differential equations describing the microbial culture both the conditions permitting
multiple limiting nutrients and the boundaries of each nutrient's range of limitation.
These deductions are a consequence of defining the limiting nutrient as the nutrient
that controls the organism's specific growth rate.  Deductions can be derived for any
model of microbial culture.

INDEX TERMS:  Cultures, Mathematical models, Growth rates.  Microorganisms,  Limiting
      factors,  Essential nutrients,  Theoretical analysis, Kinetics,  Nutrient requlre-
      nents, Chemostat, Batch cultures,  Continuous cultures,  Culture media, Monod model.
                                                                                            "AiaC-7958
                                                                                             "UPTAKE OF MSHCUHY BT CAGED RAIHBOW TROUT (SALMO CAIBDBERI)  IN THE  SOUTH SASKATCHEWAN
                                                                                             RIVER", Uthe, J. F., Alton, F. M., Royer, L.  M..  Journal of  the Fisheries Research Board
                                                                                             of Canada. Vol. 30, No. 5, May 1973, PP 6*»3-650.                 '	
 AMIC-7953
 "EFFECTS  OF LOGGING ON GROWTH OF  JUVENILE COHO SALMON", Iwanaga, P. M., Hall, J. D.,
 Oregon State University, Department  of Fisheries and Wildlife, Corvallis, Oregon,
 Report No. EPAJ?3-73-006, April 1973,  35 pp.

           The objective of this research was to study the effects of increased water
 temperature characteristic of clearcut watersheds of Pacific coastal streams upon the
 growth rate of Juvenile coho salmon.   The natural temperature fluctuations of the stream
 were used In the study of growth  of underyearling fish held In aquarluns and fed at
 various consumption levels.  Juvenile  coho experiencing the cooler temperature of the
 control stream demonstrated generally better growth rates than did those that
 experienced the warmer temperatures of the clearcut stream.  The reduced maintenance
 requirements  in the control experiment indicated a reduced basal metabolic demand, which
 allowed for a  greater portion of the food consumed to be utilized for growth.  This was
 jartleularly true at low levels of consumption.   Growth rates of juvenile coho salmon in
 ihe wild state  were found to be slightly higher in the clearcut stream as compared to
unlogged stream.   This difference from the experimental results may have been due to a
change In  availability and abundance of food.   There was a marked decrease in the
cutthroat  trout population in the clearcut stream, which may have reduced competition
 Tor the coho salaon.   There was no apparent Influence of Infestation by 'salmon
 XJlsonlng' fluke on the condition of the Juvenile coho In the clearcut stream.

 NDEX TERMS:  Water pollution effects.  Thermal stress,  Coho salmon, Juvenile fish,
      Bioassay  Lumbering, Watersheds (basins), Water temperature, Growth rates. Animal
      growth,  Animal parasites, Tremtodes, Laboratory tests. Animal metabolism
      Needle Branch, Flynn Creek,  Oncorhynchus klsutcfa, Sanophyetus salmincola, Food
      consumption, Deer Creek.		
                                                                                                     Rainbow trout were held in cages In the South Saskatchewan River  to  assess
                                                                                            mercury uptake following curtailment of mercury discharges to the  river.   Six fish were
                                                                                            taken from the cages at random at 2-week intervals and pooled homogenate samples were
                                                                                            taken from the livers, kidneys, and headless,  dressed carcasses.   The total mercury
                                                                                            content of samples was determined by nameless atomic absorption spectroscopy.  There
                                                                                            was a rapid uptake of mercury by the fish during the  first warm sumner period (1970) witi
                                                                                            much less uptake during the rest of the year.   A  second sumner experiment  (1971} produeec
                                                                                            no significantly different results suggesting  that a  long-term contamination exists
                                                                                            within this river system.   Analyses showed that the bulk of mercury present in the fish
                                                                                            carcasses was present as methylmercury.   It was concluded  that caged fish are good
                                                                                            monitors of mercury pollution.   The studies also  showed that  the cessation of mercury
                                                                                            discharge Into a river does not lead to  elimination of mercury uptake in fish.

                                                                                            INDEX TERMS:   Mercury,  Absorption,  Rainbow trout, Water pollution effects,  On-slte tests
                                                                                                  Blomonltoring,  Metbylmercury,  Liver, Kidneys, Sample preservation.
                                                                                         AfflC-7961
                                                                                         "A SIMPLE METHOD FOR RECORDING FISH HEART AND OPERCULUM BEATS WITHOUT THE  USE  OF
                                                                                         IMPLANTED ELECTBOEES, Ronmel, S. A., Jr., Journal of the Fisheries  Research Board of
                                                                                         Canada, Vol. 30, No. 5, May 1973, pp 693-69!?:

                                                                                                  A method Is described by which heart and opercular beats can be recorded
                                                                                         from gently restrained, freely-swimnlng fish without Implanting electrodes.  The
                                                                                         fish were restrained In soft plastic mesh cages  so that the long axis  of the body was
                                                                                         usually aligned in one direction.  Electrodes, consisting of  carbon rods with leads
                                                                                         to a polygraph,  were fastened to either end of the cage.  Electronic filtering was used
                                                                                         to eliminate low frequency swlmning movements and high  frequency electrical noises.
                                                                                         Atlantic salmon  and American eel were used in the tests.  The method was usable
                                                                                         in waters with resistivities between UOOO ohm-cm «"•»* too ohm-cm.   Best results were
                                                                                         obtained In water of about 1000 ohm-cm.   Excellent agreement was obtained between the
                                                                                         water electrode  recording and Implanted  electrode  recordings.   The method can
                                                                                     the)minimize fish handling in some physiological  experiments.

                                                                                         INDEX TERMS:   Electrodes,  Fish physiology, Methodology,  Fish,  Atlantic salmon,
                                                                                               Heart rate,  Opercular beats, Electrocardiograms, Angullla roatrata, American eel,
                                                                                               Salmo salar.

-------
                                                                                2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
  AMC-7963
  "SOW SHCRT-TEFM INDICATORS 07 SUBIE3HAL EFFECTS OF COPPER OH BROOK TROUT, SALVELIHUS
  FOHTINALIS". Drumiond, R. A., Spoor, W. A., Olson, C. F., Journal of the Fisheries
  jl-_sjirch Board of Canada, Vol. 30, NO. 5, Ms.y 1973, pp 6983fol".                 ~

           Laboratory tests were conducted to evaluate changes In cough frequency,
  loccmotor activity, snd feeding behavior as possible short-term Indicators of the
  long-tenc effects of copper on brook trout.  The trout were studied In plastic electrode
  chambers that allowed free movement In continuously flowing water.  The electrodes      j
  measured respiratory and other movements, which were recorded on a polygraph.  The effect
  of copper on coupling w^s measured by comparing cough frequency during a 2U-hour exposing
  to that during the preceding 2U~hour period.   The effect on locomotor activity was
  measured during the first 2 hours of exposure and compared with activity the day before
  the test and with that of controls.   Feeding behavior was monitored at 2 and 21* hours
  after exposure began and any departure from normal aggressive feeding patterns was
  recorded.   Changes occurred In all three activities at copper concentrations near  9.5
  microgrruns/1.   Each response thus showed practise as a short-term Indicator of the
  concentration r*mge at which chronic exposure might have no permanent effect.   Cough
  frequency  was  the best of the three  for showing stress according to the copper
  concentration,  but the change developed more  slowly than in loccmotor activity.

  INDEX  TERMS:   Copper,  Toxicity, Brook trout,  Fish behavior,  Blolndlcators,  laboratory
        tests, Wnter pollution effects.  Monitoring,  Lethal limit,  Food habits, Bloassay,
        Pollutant effects,  Cough frequency,  Locomotor activity, Salvelinua fontlnalle.
 AMIC-7965
 "A COMPARISON OF LIQUID SCINTILLATION AND GEIGER-MULLER ESTIMATES OF PRIMARY
 PRODUCTIVITY IK AM IN SITU EXPERIMENT", Ward, F. J., Nakanlshi, M., Journal of the
 Fisheries Research Board of Canada. Vol. 30, No. 5, Miy 1973, PP 708-711.
          For an in situ experiment conducted in Shlozu Bay, Lake Blva, Japan, primary
productivity estimates from liquid scintillation radioactivity counts of wet algae were
generally higher than those from Geiger-Muller radioactivity counts of desiccated algae
Values at 0 m were similar, the G-M estimate at 0.5 m was 10 percent higher, but from 3
to  13  m the liquid scintillation values ranged from 11 to 33 percent higher than
G-M estimates.  The 20-m estimates were low and similar.  Differences were caused
primarily by C-lk losses during desiccation prior to G-M counting.  Increasing loss rates
between 0.5 and 3.0 n may have been caused by decreasing light Intensity.  On the basis
Of  surface area,  the estimate from liquid scintillation data was FJ percent greater than
that obtained from G-M data.   The results Indicated that previously recommended methods
for sajnple preparation and radioactivity determinations may cause primary productivity
estimates  from In situ data to be significantly in error.

INDEX TERMS:   Primary productivity,  Radioactivity techniques, On-slte tests,
      Methodology,  Liquid scintillation, Geiger-Muller estimates, Comparative studies,
      Method evaluation,  C-lU,  Sample preparation.
 AMIC-7979
 "SOME EFFECTS OF EVAPORATION SUPPRESSION ON RESERVOIR ECOLOGY", Eilvey, J. K. G,,
 Sharp, H. B., Dickson, K. L., et al., Journal American Water Works Association. Vol.
 65, No. b, April 1973, PP 360-268.

 St       Studies were made in Lake Hefner, in Oklahoma City water supply reservoir,  to
 determine the effects of hexndecinol on biological, chemical, ind physical -ispects of
 water quality.  Hexadee-dnol is a chemical applied to suppress evaporation.  Camples
 were taken twice a week from five stations during summer months *nd analyzed for
 bacteria, algae, phosphates, and nitrates.  Chemical and physical analyses for hardness,
 temperature, specific conductance, pH, carbonates, blcarbonates, sulfatcs, chlorides,
 DO, C02, Iron, color ind turbidity were performed weekly.  During winter months,
 monthly samples were analyzed In a like manner.   The study was conducted over a 5-year
 period.  The application of hexadecanol apparently had no detectable deleterious effect
 on chemical water quality.   Some stimulation in  the population of certain bacterial
 organisms could be seen,  but only when a composite was nude of all data from esch
 station.  A slight correlation could also be made between laboratory studies and the
 organisms shown to be stimulated in the reservoir.   But since other conditions  may have
 had an effect,  It was not possible to conclude that population Increases were due
 entirely to hexadecanol.  There was no apparent  difference in bottom fauna between
 periods of coverage and non-coverage.   It was concluded that hexadecanol In  the
 concentrations  used had no detectable effect on  the ecology of the reservoir.
 INDEX  TERMS:  Aquatic algae. Aquatic Insects, Reservoirs,  Evaporation control,
       Hexadecanol,  Water  quality, Aquatic bacteria. Annelids, Benthos, Aquatic  fungi.
       Freshwater fish,  Monomolecular films.
AMIC-60UO
 "ECOLOGY OF WO  BELATED SPECIES OF CAPDIG FLY LARVAE IN THE ORGANIC SUBSTRATES
OF A WOODLAND STREAM", Mackay, R. J., Kalff, J., Ecology, Vol. 5k, No. 3,
     Spring 1973, pp 1(99-511.
         Two species of Pycnopsyche larvae Inhabiting allochthonous organic materials
in West Creek are contemporaneous and similar in size.  Field studies and laboratory
experiments show that about 90 percent of P. gentllis larvae live In fallen leaves,
which they use as food and for case materials; the remaining 10 percent occur in
detritus with P. luculenta.  P. luculenta can utilize leaves or woody materials;  50
percent of the population Is Tn detritus, and 50 percent is In more leafy habitats,
but not far from detritus.  The distribution of each species from September through
March depends on the amount of preferred habitat space available.   Larvae in leafy
habitats are washed downstream during the spring thaw by habitat displacemnet.   In
1971, two-thirds of the P. qentills population and nearly half the P.  luculenta
population were displaced.  The subsequent shortage of leafy habitat space  and crowding
of remaining larvae may result in competitive interaction and predation by  grackles.
In the laboratory, both species feed preferentially on leaves that decay  quickly,
especially on leaves Infected with fungi.  Dry weights  of leaf tissue  ingested
per larva In 2k hours frequently exceed 50 percent  of the dry body weight of the larva.
P. luculenta ingests less  leaf material If twigs  are available.  The niche  size of
P. gentllls is smaller than the of P.  luculenta.  There is  some niche overlap, but it
apparently does not normally result~ln harmful competition between the  species.
INDEX TERMS:   Caddisflies,  larvae. Organic matter. Ecology. Aquatic habitats, On-slte
      testa,  Laboratory tests,  Detritus,  Leaves, Natural  streams, Animal populations,
      Niches,  Woodland  stream,  Substrate  utilization, Food sources.

-------
                                                                               2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
AMIC-8068
"HE GEOGRAPHIC DISTRIBUTION OF FRESHWATER HIRUDINOLDEA IN CANADA", Davles, R. W.,
Canadian Journftl of Zoology, Vol. 51, No. 5, May 1973, pp 531-5^5.

         The distribution for each species of freshwater leech (Hlrudinoidea) Is
described and discussed on n province or territory basis.  The hosts for those species
recorded as temporary parasites are listed.  One hundred and eight new species
records are listed including 28 records new to the province or territory.
Percymoorensls lateralls is recorded in Canada for the first time, and the first
record of freshwater leeches in the Yukon made.

INDEX TERMS:  Systematics,  Aquatic animals, Canada,  Annelids, Speclation, Spatial
      distribution. Animal  groupings, Leeches, Macrolnvertebrates, Hirudinea.
 AMIC-ao71
 "TRENDS IN METHODOLOGY FOR EVALUATION OF EFFECTS OF POLLUTANTS ON MARINE ORGANISMS
 AND ECOSYSTEMS", Waldichuk, M., CRC-Critical Reviews in Environmental Control, Vol. 3,
 No.  2,  February 1973, PP 167-211.

          The literature related to biological and chemical methodology for evaluating
 the  effects of pollutants on marine organisms is reviewed.  Research findings are
 considered from the very pragmatic point of view and the review is an extension of the
 presentation on the subject made earlier.  In this case, it does not cover in depth
 broader considerations of physiological and biochemical studies on the effects of
 pollutants on marine organisms, from which there is an ever-Increasing literature.
Also, much of the microbiological research on marine pollution has been largely
 unreviewed.

INDEX TERMS:   On-site investigations, Analytical techniques, Methodology, Evaluation,
      Water pollution effects,  Ecosystems,  Reviews,  Pollutant Identification, Bioassay,
      Laboratory  tests,  Marine  fish,  Cold-water fish,  Animal physiology, Primary
      productivity, Secondary productivity, laboratory equipment, Instrumentation,
      Growth stages.  Marine algae,  Marine bacteria.  Crustaceans, MoUurtcs, Marine
      animals. Invertebrates, Toxlcity,  Lethal limit,  Animal behavior, Pollutant
      effects, Marine environment,  Macrolnvertebrates,  Bioaccumulation, Data
      interpretation, Median tolerance limit.
                                                                                           AKTC-8080
                                                                                            "AVOIDANCE OF PESTICIDES BY GRASS SHRIMP (PALAEMDNETES FUGIO)". Hansen,  D.  J.,
                                                                                           Schlmnel, S. C., Keltner, J. M., Jr., Bulletin of Environmental Contamination and
                                                                                           Toxicology, Vol. 9, No. 3, March 1973, PP 129-133.

                                                                                                    The capacity of the euryhaline grass shrimp, Pqlaemonetes pugio,  to avoid water
                                                                                           polluted by DDT, endrin, Dursban, raalathion, Sevtn, or 2,5-D was evaluated.  Grass
                                                                                           shrimp were sieved from ponds and acclimated for at least 5 days in the  laboratory at
                                                                                           20 percent salinity and 20 C.  Avoidance was tested by allowing the shrimp  to move
                                                                                           from a holding area into one of two sections, one with pesticide polluted water and the
                                                                                           other with unpolluted water.  Light was excluded during experiments.   It was
                                                                                           assumed, and corroborated in preliminary tests,  that in the absence of pollutants  the
                                                                                           shrimp would enter the two areas with equal frequency.  Chi-square tests were used to
                                                                                           analyze the results.   The shrimp avoided 1.0 and 10.0 ppm concentrations of the
                                                                                           herbicide 2,U-D but did not avoid any of the five insecticides.   Given a choice between
                                                                                           two concentrations of 2,k-D, they chose the lower concentration.   The  data  suggest that
                                                                                           shrimp may be extremely vulnerable to pesticide  pollution because they are  very
                                                                                           sensitive to pesticides and are unlikely to avoid water polluted  by them.

                                                                                           INDEX TERMS:   DDT,  Endrin,  2 Uj),  Bloaesay,  Animal behavior, Pesticide toxicity, Water
                                                                                                 pollution effects, Crustaceans,  Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides, Phosphothioate
                                                                                                 pesticides, Carbamate pesticides,  Dursban,  (-biathlon, Sevin, Avoidance,
                                                                                                 Palaemonetes  puglo, Grass shrimp,  Macroinvertebrates, Median tolerance limit.
                                                                                         AMIC-8089
                                                                                         "A SENSITIVE MECHANIZED DETERMINATION OF ATP PLUS ADP",  Loos,  J. A., v«n Doom,
                                                                                         R. C. H., Roos, D., Analytical Biochemistry. Vol. ^3,  No.  1, l>fey 1973, pp  309-312.

                                                                                                  A method for the mechanized determination of ATP  plus ADP using a cyclic
                                                                                         enzymatic system which was previously described has been improved to increase the
                                                                                         sensitivity to 6 nm.  The improved system differs in the way in which the  conversion
                                                                                         of ATP into ADP is measured and is based on the consumption of NADH.  In the earlier
                                                                                         system it was necessary to free the enzyme mixture by  filtration.  It has been found
                                                                                         now that all the commercially purified enzymes  can be  substituted by 'adolase paste'
                                                                                         without changing the sensitivity or reproduclbility.   The  new method yielded less than
                                                                                         5 percent difference with erythrocyte lysates when quenching of the fluorometric
                                                                                         signal by haemoglobin was taken into account.  With leukocytes, less than 10 percent
                                                                                         difference was found.   ATP added to these lysates  was  recovered quantitatively.   This
                                                                                         indicates that the determination is specific for ATP plus ADP in lysates of human
                                                                                         erythrocytes and leukocytes.

                                                                                         INDEX TERMS:  Pollutant identification, Biochemistry, Methodology,  ATP,  ADP,
                                                                                               Enzymatic tests.  Sensitivity,  Sample preparation, Blood,  Biological samples.

-------
                                                                               'I.   BIOLOGICAL METHODS
  AMIC-0103
  "FINAL REPORT OH DRIKT STATION BIOLOGY:   ZOPLANKTOH TAXONOMf AMD SORTIHG PHOGRAJC"
  Fernandez,  H. p., University of Southern California, Department of Biological
  Sciences, Los Angeles, Cnlifornla, Final Report,  Contract No.
          1973, "»5 PI-   NTTC Report No. AD 756 661.
 AKEC-810U (Continued)
Card 2/2
 INDEX TEWE:   Eutrophieation, Water  quality, Nutrients, Primary productivity,
       Phytoplankton,  Water cjunlity control, Hydrography, Epilimnlon, Phosphorus,
       Nitrogen,  Chemical  properties, Cyinophyta, Pv> rophytn, Hypolimnlcm, Finger
           The V-xonuulc studies of Arctic zooplankton conducted as part of til*
  activities of ttw lire Arctic Project are sunmarlzed.  The purposes of such studies
  were to (l) identify the marine fauna of the area.;  (2) produce taJtonoolc guides
  which would enable biologists to readily identify Arctic zooplankton;  and (3) study
  the biology of some of the org>mlsmfi, to form the basis for biochemical and
  physiological investigations.  This report  also includes a list of the stations  and
  the organisms Identified.  (See also: AWC-SlO? an) AMIC-831U)

|  INDEX TERMS:  Zooplankton,  Systematic s,  Classification, Ecological distribution,
|        Arctic Ocean,  Crustaceans, Invertebrates,  Sampling,  Annelids, Molluaks,  Marine
        animals,  Taxonranic guides. Vertical distribution. Sample preservation,
        Chaetognaths,  Tunicates,  Nemerteans, Macro-Invertebrates,  Ctenophora, Coelenterates
 AMIC-8101*
 "EUTROlfllCATlON AS A  PROBLEM IN IHE  FINGER  LAKES",  Oglesby,  R.  T.,  Cornell University,
 Water Resources and Marine Sciences  Center,  Ithaca, New York, Technical Report Mo.  53,
 Contract Dos. lU-01-OOOl-lUOO,  1852, H>-31-0001-3032,  3332,  and 3532,  October 1972,
 23 pp.  NTIS Report No.  PB-21<*  772.

          Water quality and related parameters have  been established for four  of the
 Finger Lakes and reinforced for a fifth.  This  Information suggests possibilities fen-
 water quality management directed at control of phytoplankton production.  It also
 indicates what additional  Information Is needed in  order  to  develop a  more refined
 management model.  This  project began with  a review of the literature  concerned with
 the  Finger Lakes and a detailed napping of  land use patterns In their  dralnago basins
 and  major sub-basins.  A program of  stream  sampling was begun with  samples being taken
 under different climatological  and hydrologlcal regimes in an attempt  to see  If ready
 correlations between nitrogen and phosphorus and land  use could be  obtained.  In late
 1970 emphasis shifted to the lakes themselves and a regular  llmnologlc&l -awpling
        was initiated and carried out fro*  1971 to  the present    Emphasis was placed on
               nutrients and on phytoplankton standing  crop,  but other  atandard
              measurements have been -=ade throughout the course  of «'*fl  Th.
                    nutrient variation with  fluctuation ^f ^

                                           ,       Blmllarlty of variation  in  eplllmetic
                                (       ^engly ^ater  dependence of phytcplaakton on
soluble phosphorus than on saline nitrogen.
AMIC-8106
"MICHDBIAi. FORMATION CF POTENTIALLY HAZARDOUS CRGANO-METAL COMPOUNDS IN WATKK",
Alexander, M., Cornell University, Water Resources and Marine Sciences Center,  Ithnca,
Hew York, Report No. ^7, Contract No. 1U-31-OO01-3532, October 1972, 17 pp.  NTIS
Report No. PB-21U 698.

         Species of Candida, Gliocladium and Penlclllium from polluted waters were
found to produce trlmethylarslne gas from several arsenic sources.   The  pH of the
solution and phosphate ions had a marked effect on the biosynthesis  of this volatll*
arsenic compound.  A strain of Penlclllium which produced dlnethylselenlde from
Inorganic selenium compounds waE isolated from raw sewage.  Suifate  and  methionine
enhanced growth of the fungus and its production of dimethylselenlde in  medl* containing
selenite.  In solutions containing selenate,  methionine inhibited dimethyIselenide
formation while stimulating proliferation of the fungua.  Dimethylselenlde WEB also
generated from Inorganic selenlde.   Alkylatlon did not appear to be  a significant
mechanism of selenium detoxlcation by this Organism.   Dlmethyltelluride was also
produced by the organism from several telluriun compounds, but this product was
synthesized only In the presence of both tellurium and selenluto.  The yields of
dlmethylselenlde and dlmethyltellurlde varied with the relative concentrations of
selenium and tellurium In the medium.

INDEX T£BM3:  Mlcroblal degradation,  Water pollution sources, Aquatic fungi,  Metabolism,
      Water pollution effects, Plant growth, Organometalllcs, Candida humieola,
      GliocladlUB roseum,  Penlcinium, Biosynthesis, Biotransformation, Trlmethylarslne,
      Substrate utilization,  Dlmethylselenlde, Dlmethytelluride, Sewage fungi.

-------
                                                                                2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
  A me-8107                                   ~                        ~	
  "TAXDHOMIC GUIDES TO ARCTIC ZOOPLAMCTON (V):  PELAGIC POLYCHAETES OF THE CENTRAL
  AHCTIC BASIN", Ylngst, D. R., University of Southern California, Department of
  Biological Sciences, Los Angeles, California, Technical Report Mo. 1, Contract No.
  N0001U-671A1026910013, October 1972, "*9 pp.  N'flE Report No. AL756659.

           'Taxonomlc Guides to Arctic Zooplankton (V)1 is one in a series of six
  practical tsjconomlc guides to zoop lank ton prepared to meet the needs of
  non-taxonomists involved with Arctic fauna.  The work is based upon results of
  research by investigators associated with the USC Arctic Project *** its precursors
  since 1952.  This compilation presents a detailed consideration of the different
  adult pelagic polychaetes found in the central Arctic Ocean.  Emphasis has been
  placed on the familial level as information on the group is still Inadequate to
  Justify construction of generalized keys to species.  Provided also are a discussion
  of basic polychaete morphology and terminology used in the guide, Illustrations,
  dlchotomous keys, and hints on methodology for handling preserved specimens.   Selected
  references pertaining to polychaetes in general,  as well as those concerning
  specific polychaetes in the guide, are also included.   (See also:  AMIC-8103 and
  AMIC-831U)

  INDEX T£R»C:   Zooplankton, Arctic Ocean, Annelids,  Systematlcs,  Classification, Larvae,
        Polychaetes,  Pelagic animals,  Taxonomic  guides.  Animal morphology.  Sample
        preservation,  Macrolnvertebrates.
 AMIC-8120
 "APPARATUS FOR  SEMI-CONTINUOUS CULTURE  OF DAPHNIA", Harvey, A.  M.,  Laboratory
 Practice, Vol.  22, No.  2,  February  1973, PP 11^-115.

          An apparatus for  culturlng Daphnla, which employs seme advantage of the
 chemostat is described.  Two-litre  culture  vessels with a lU mm bottom port are used.
 A delicate agitator is  used Involving moist, sterile air bubbling through a sintered
 glass disc into an Inverted funnel  Inside the culture vessel.   This provides
 satisfactory mixing and alleviateslocalization of metabolic wastes and oxygen
 deficiency.  The vessel is autoclaved at 1? pounds per square inch for 15 minutes,
 and then Joined aseptically to sterile  food and air lines in a  controlled temperature
 room at 20 C.   A suspension of 150,000  cells per ml of Chlorella vulgar is is pumped
 into the culture vessel to a volume of  1200 ml.  Sterile, clonal Daphnia pulex
 are Introduced and the agitation system activated.  The culture is allowed to Increase
 and equilibrate for six days, and the pump  is switched on again to give the desired
 dilution rate.   Although this apparatus necessarily falls short of a true chemostat in
 some respects of Its  design,  it represents a much more satisfactory method than
 previous ones used for culturing Daphnia.  The main advantages  are of constancy
 In  the environment, simplicity of control, and physiological uniformity.  The
methods  used here to  minimize particular problems presented by Daphnia could easily
 ae modified to allow  the culture of other aquatic invertebrates in a similar system.

INDEX TERMS:  Daphnia, Sampling, Zooplankton, Laboratory equipment, Crustaceans,
      Chemostat, Culturlng  vessels,  Culturing techniques, Macroinvertebrates.
 AMIC-8166                                                                           —
  "SYNERGISTIC BIOJ5JTEC15 OF OIL AHD IRRADIATION IK AN AQUATIC ORGANISM,
 TARICHA GRAHULOSA", Lappenbusch, V. L., Ward, J. M., Bulletin of Environmental
 Contamination and Toxicology. Vol. 9, No. 2, February 1973,  pp 75-79.

          A study was conducted to determine lethal toxcity of oil and  the possible
 synergistic effects of oil on the radiosensitivlty of the rough-skinned  newt
 (Tarlcha granulosa).  After accllmltization at 10 C to simulate winter conditions,
 newts were initially placed in «tOOO ml of water containing 0,  0.5,  1.0,  2.5,  5, 10,
 20, or 50 percent by volume regular non-detergent motor oil.   After determining oil
 toxlcity levels, additional newts were classified in four groups prior to irradiation.
 One group was unexposed to either oil or irradiation,  a seconi was  irradiated only,
 a third was continuously exposed to 0.5 percent oil but not  irradiated,  »nd a forth
 continuously exposed to 0.5 percent oil and irradiated.   The newts  then  absorbed
 0, 10OO,  2500,  5000, or 10,000 reds of x-rays.   Their  behavior,  physical appearance
 and activity,  and mortality were observed.   Several dead newts  of each group  were
 necropsled and their tissues were examined.   Oil toxicity was found to be acute, not
 chronic,  at concentrations  of 2.5 percent and higher.  Newts subjected to 1,000,
 2,500,  5,000,  and 10,000 rads has mean survival  times  of lUl, 117, 85 and 5U days.
 For those subjected to  0.5  oil and radiation these  survival time were lowered to
 98,  75, 53, and 29 days.  It was  concluded that  exposure to oil  increases the
 radlosensitlvlty of this  newt synergistlcally.

 INDEX TERMS:  Oil,  Irradiation, Water pollution  effects, Toxleity, Radioactivity effects
      Lethal limit,  Synergistic effects, Rough-skinned newt,  Histopathology,  Necropsy,
      Animal tissues.
AMIC-8169
 "TOXICin OF METHYL MERCURY FOR STEELHEAD TROUT SPERM", Mclntyre,  J.  D.,  Bulletin of
Environmental Contamination and Toxicology, Vol. 9,  No. 2,  February 1973,  pp 9B-99T"
A test was performed to determine the concentrations of methylmercuric
chloride that would reduce the viability of sperm from the  steelhead trout.  Sperm
obtained from five fish was combined, and 0.1-ml aliquots were removed and Inoculated
into test tubes containing mercury concentrations of 1 g/1  to 10 mg/1.  The samples
were maintained at 11 C.  The sperm was left in solution 30 minutes  and then combined
with 100 steelhead eggs from a single female.   Percentage of  fertilization was
determined on the 17th day.  Reduced fertilization of eggs  indicated that
concentrations of mercury greater than or equal to 1 ppra reduced sperm  viability.  At
concentrations greater than 1 ppm the reductions increased  sharply.

INDEX TERMS:   Toxicity, Mercury,  Rainbow trout,  Viability, Water pollution effects,
      Reproduction,  Btoassay,  Cold-water fish, Cytological  studies, Sperm, Methylmercury,
      Steelhead trout,  Salmo gairdneri,  Methylmercuric chloride. Cell physiology.

-------
                                                                                2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
  AMIC-8170
  "CADMIUM TOXICITf AND ACCUMULATION IN SOUIHERN NAIAD", Cearley, J. E., Coleman, F. L.,
  Bulletin cf Environmental Contamination and Toxicology, Vol. 9, Bo. 2, February 1973,
i  pp 10O-101.
!
           /n investigation vis undertaken to determine the effects of three different
  levels of cidirlum on the uptake nnd accumulation of this metal by the southern naifd, a
'  vaterweed.  A static bioassay wss conducted over a 21^1ay period using duplicate
  exposure chambers for each exposure level.  The plants were acclimated for 2 weeks and
  the roots removed before placement in the containers.  Plants were exposed to different
;  Cd levels for O, 11, and ?1 days.  After exposure, the plant tissues were rinsed, dried
,  for 2U hrs at 100 C, and ashed for 2k hours.  Metal determinations were made by
j  spectrophotometry.  The exposed plants showed reductions of chlorophyll, turgor and
  stolon development not seen in controls.  Toxic reactions and Cd accumulation by the
I  plants Increased as the exposure levels increased, which suggested that (a) Cd
i  accumulation,  ca. 1000 fold, was a direct function of the exposure level, and (b) the
1  detoxifying mechanlsr. was over-taxed at a more rapid rate at the higher levels resulting
:  In an earlier  Impairment of physiological function.   It is evident that this connon
'  aquatic plant  Is capable of introducing potentially  toxic quantities of cadmium into the
  food chain of  higher organisms,  e.g.  sunflsh and waterfowl.

  INDEX TERMS:   Cadmium,  Toxlcity,  Bloassay,  Water pollution effects,  Absorption,  Food
        chains,  Path of pollutants,  Southern naiad,  Bioaccumulatlon,  Hajas guadalupensis.
 AMIC-8213
 "INORGANIC NITFCCEN REMOVAL FBOM WAS7EWATEF:  EFFECT ON  PHYTOPLANKTON GROWTH IN COASTAL
 MARINE WATERS", Goldman, J.  C.,  Tenore, K. R., Stanley,  H. I., Science. Vol. 180,
 No. 1«089, June 1, 1973, PP  955-956.

          Algal bloassays were used to demonstrate the high efficiency of a combined
 tertiary vastewater treatment and marine aquaculture system  In removing inorganic
 nitrogen, and to show that the coastal waters off Wood*  Hole, Massachusetts, are
 limited in nitrogen for marine phytoplankton growth.  When nutrients were removed
 from secondarily treated domestic wastewater through assimilation by phytoplankton
 in an outdoor growth pond, the pond effluents, in varying dilutions with seawater, could
 not support more phytoplankton growth than the seawater  alone.  However, when nitrogen
 was added back to the mixtures of pond effluent and seawater, the phytoplankton growth
 response  was  similar to that with a mixture of wastewater and seawater.  This is
 sljnilar to  the findings of other researchers, and suggests that nitrogen may be the key
 growth-limiting nutrient in many coastal marine waters.  The combined tertiary
 treatment-marine aquaculture system appears to be an effective means of removing
nitrogen  from secondarily treated wastewater and controlling eutrophlcation of
coastal marine waters.

INDEX TERMS:   Nitrogen,  Waste water treatment, Phytoplankton, Growth rates, Bioassay,
      Marine  algae, Tertiary treatment,  Nutrient removal, Sea water, Nutrient
      requirements^ Pollutant removal, Algal growth potential.
                                                                                            AMIC-8215                                   ~~                                   "    ~~
                                                                                            "BENTHIC MACROmVERTEBRATE COMMUNITY STRUCUTHE IN A GREAT PLAINS STREAM RECEIVING
                                                                                            FEEDLOT RUSOFF", Prophet, C. W., Edwards, N. L.t  Water Resources Bulletin.  Vol.  9,
                                                                                            Ho. 3, June 1973, PP 583-589.                                          ~~

                                                                                                     The effect of feedlot runoff on the env 1 ronrental quality of the (".„•> tonvod
                                                                                            Fiver in e=.st central Kansas was ev-i3ur>.ted by analysis of c r.muilty -tj-uctura  of Lunthlc
                                                                                            macrolnvertebrates using the species diversity Irxlex,  (d bar).   The benthic f-nna along
                                                                                            the study reach was dominated by mayflies, cadcllsflies,  midges,  riffle l-cetlfs.,  and the
                                                                                            pelecypod,  Sphaerlum.  Sixty-five taxa were Identified during the study;  the benthic
                                                                                            fauna was most abundant during the 1968-69 segment of  the study.   However,  the mean
                                                                                            species diversity Index per station Indicated the river was subject to moderate
                                                                                            environmental stress, and species diversity indices of those stations Immediately
                                                                                            downstream from feedlots were significantly lower than the species diversity index
                                                                                            at the control station.   There was a significant  increase In species diversity indices
                                                                                            during the  1970-71 segment of the study,  following the closing of two feedlots.   The
                                                                                            results Indicate periodic feedlot runoff  had a continuing adverse effect  on the
                                                                                            environmental quality of the river,  but recovery  was rapid as the organic load on the
                                                                                            river  was reduced.

                                                                                            INDEX  TERMS:   Feed lots,  Benthic  fauna, Biological communities, Water quality, Mollusks,
                                                                                                  Oligochaetes, Gastropods, Blcoass, Clams, Aquatic  insects, Annelids, Species
                                                                                                  diversity  index, Feedlot runoff,  Macrolnvertebrates, Data interpretation,
                                                                                                  Lefechee, Turbellaria.
                                                                                           AMIC-8273
                                                                                           "EPOXIDATION AND FATE OF (C-ll»)ALDRIN IN INSECTICIDE-RESISTANT AND SUSCEPTIBLE
                                                                                           POPULATIONS OF MOSQUITOFISH (GAMBUSIA AFFIHIS]". Wells, H. R.,  Ludke,  J. L.,
                                                                                           Yarbrough, J. D., Journal of Agricultural and Food Chemistry, Vol.  21, No,  3,
                                                                                           May/June 1973, PP
                                                                                                    One susceptible and two resistant populations of mosqultoflsh (Cambusla
                                                                                           affinls) were treated with (C-lU)aldrin to determine differences In aldrln expoxldatlon
                                                                                           between susceptible and resistant mosqultofish brains and livers.   Three groups  of nine
                                                                                           fish from each population were tested In 5 ppb of C-lU aldrln.   The aldrin was shown
                                                                                           by assay to contain 2.5 percent dleldrln.   Three fish were removed  from each group
                                                                                           after 4-8 hr exposure, washed carefully,  and tissue samples were extracted and
                                                                                           homogenized.  After protein determination, samples were extracted three times with
                                                                                           hexane and twice for recovery of lipld-bound material in the brain  with 3:1
                                                                                           chlorof orm-methanol .  Thin-layer chromotography samples were prepared  from the
                                                                                           remaining aqueous portion of the samples and were counted  using  a scintillation
                                                                                           spectrometer.   Resistant mosqultofish converted aldrln to  dieldrin  and/or  water-soluble
                                                                                           material at a  greater rate than susceptible  mosqultoflsh.  These data would tend to
                                                                                           support rate of detoxification as a possible mechanism of  resistance to Aldrin in
                                                                                           the mosqultoflsh.

                                                                                           INDEX TERMS:  Aldrln,  Animal metabolism, Fish populations, Bioassay, Path of pollutants,
                                                                                                 Water pollution effects,  Pesticide toxiclty, Chlorinated hydrocarbon pesticides,
                                                                                                 Insecticides,  Chemical analysis, Mosqultofish, Gambusla affinis,  Fate of pollutants,
                                                                                                 Detoxification,  Epoxldation, Thin layer chromotography.  Animal tissues.

-------
                                                                                2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
  AMIC-8283
  "UPTAKE AMD ACCUMULATION OF DDT AND PCB BY EPHEMERA DAHICA (EPHEMEROPIERA) IN
  CONTINUOUS-FLOW SYSTEMS", Sodergren, A., Svensson, BJ., Bulletin of Environmental
  Contamination and Toxicology. Vol. 9, No. 6, June 1973, pp 31*5-350.

           The kinetics of uptake and accumulation of DDT and PCB by mayflies was examined
  In a continuous-flow systems.  Fifty Ephemera danlca nymphs were used as test organisms
  and were introduced to the continuous-flow system Immediately after collection from a
  Swedish stream.  DDT and PCB were dissolved in ethanol and added to the systems.   Five
  nymphs were then withdrawn each day for residue analysis.  During the nine days of the
  experiment the animals received no food so that uptake was strictly via the g*Tig and
  integument.  Gas chromatography was used for residue analysis.  Uptake and accumulation
  of both substances followed a similar pattern.   After U-5 days exposure an apparent
  constant level was established, indicating equilibrium between uptake and excretion of
  the substances.  The accuraulation of residues as a function of the concentration In the
  water showed a similar pattern.  A kinetic equation of the first order Is proposed as a
  model for uptake.

  IHDEX TERMS:   DDT,  Polychlorinated blphenyls, Absorption, Mayflies,  Pesticide kinetics,
        Laboratory tests,  Pesticide residues,  Mathematical models. Ephemera danlca,
        Bioaccumulation, Continuous flow system,  Nymphs.
 AMIC-828U
 "MOLYBDENUM TOXIC ITY:  ABNORMAL CELLULAR DIVISION OF TERATOGENIC APPEARANCE IN
 EUGLENA GRACILJS", Colmano, G., Bulletin of Environmental Contamination and Toxicology,
 Vol. 9, H6."5,~June 1973, PP 361-36U.
          Molybdenum is shown to be Involved in the mechanism of cellular division
 that produces monsters In Euglena.  Euglena cells were first grown In a medium
 containing 5.U4 ppm molybdenum.  These cells divided by normal fission and had a normal
 growth rate.   When the molybdenum concentration was accldently Increased 20-fold,
 abnormal clusters of three to nine actively moving cells attached to each other at one
 end appeared.   In further experiments, it was found that these abnormal forms,
 accompanied by blue coloration of the culture medium,  appeared only with high
 molybdenum concentrations.   Change In concentration of other components affected only
 the growth rate.   It was concluded that molybdenum may be considered toxic and may be
an  inhibitor of cellular fission with resultant nuclear and chromosomal polyploldy and
abnormal mitoses.   It was hypothesized that a similar toxiclty of molybdenum may
activate the uncontrolled growth patterns observed In some neoplastlc growths.

INDEX TERMS:  Molybdenum, Toxiclty,  Cytological studies, Cultures, Euglena gracllls,
      Teratogenlclty.
 AMIC-831U
 "TAXONOMIC GUIDES TO ARCTIC ZOOPLANKTON (VI):  APPENDICULARIANS OF THE CENTRAL
 ARCTIC,  MYSIDS OF THE ARCTIC OCEAN AND CONFLUENT SEAS, FIELD GUHE TO ARCTIC
 ZOOPLANKTONIC CRUSTACEANS OSTRACQDS OF THE CENTRAL ARCTIC", Leung, Y.-m., University
 of Southern California, Department of Biological Sciences, Los Angeles, California,
 Technical Report No. 2, Contract No. NOOOl't-67-A-0269-0013, October 1972, U8 pp.
 NTIE Report No. AD-756 660.

          "Taxononic Guides to Arctic Zooplankton (VI)" is the last in the series of
 practical taxonomlc guides to zoplankton prepared by  the USC Arctic Project to meet
 the needs of non-taxonomists involved with Arctic fauna.  Material presented In this
 guide Is based upon results of research by Investigators associated with this
 Project  and its precursors since 1952.   This compilation is composed of information
 on the five species of ostracods and five  species of  appendicularians found amongst
 central  Arctic zooplankton; myslds from the central Arctic and peripheral seas; and a
 general  guide to Arctic zooplanktonlc crustaceans.  Each guide contains dlchotomous
 keys and complementary Illustrations,  special notes on individual species, and
 selected references to literature pertaining to  the Included groups.  (See also:
 AMIC-8103 and AMIC-8107)

 INDEX TERMS:   Zooplankton,  Arctic Ocean, Crustaceans, Invertebrates, On-site data
       collections,  Benthic  fauna,  Appendicularians, Taxonondc guides,
       Macroinvertebrates.
AMIC-S315
"ECOLOGICAL EFFECTS OF OFFSHORE DREDGING AND BEACH NOURISHMENT:  A REVIEW",  Thompson,
J. R., University of Southern Mississippi, Hattiesberg, Mississippi, Miscellaneous
Paper No. 1-73, January 1973, 39 p.  NTIS Report No. AD-756 366.

         A review of ecological effects of offshore dredging is presented, based on
literature review and personal contacts, to provide a framework for determination of
need for further knowledge.  In general, little concrete effort aimed specifically at
the determination of effects of offshore dredging was uncovered, although basic
ecological works that are generally applicable are available.   Much additional  research
of basic, but practical, orientation Is needed to approach full understanding.  The
report shows that the beach may be divided into three zones on the basis  of moisture and
biota found, and describes the possible effects on these biota resulting  from offshore
dredging and deposition of sediments on a beach.  Background descriptive  material and
impacts on both offshore dredged areas and nourished beaches,  and suggestions for
further research follow,  A selected biblography is included.

INDEX TERMS:  Dredging, Sediments,  Ecosystems,  Environmental effects, Coastal
      engineering, Bibliographies,  Reviews, Benthic flora.  Bottom fish, Biota,  Turbidity,
      Suspended solids, Benthic fauna, Zoning,  Beach nourishment,  Marine  environment.

-------
                                                                               2.  BIOLOGICAL METHODS
 AMIC-8316
  "EFFECT OF  THERMAL SHOCK ON VULNERABILITY TO  PFEDATIOH IN JUVENILE  SALMDKLBS.   II.
 A DOSE RESPONSE  BY RAINBOW TROUT TO THREE SHOCK  TEMPERATURES", Coutant, C. C.,
 Battelle Memorial Institute,  Pacific Northwest Laboratories,  Rlchland, Washington,
 Report No.  UCJiS,  Contract No.  AT (l»5-l)-l830, November 1972, 12 pp.  NTIS Report No.
 BNWL-1519.

           Juvenile rainbow trout (£a1mo  galrdnerl)  were found  to  be  more vulnerable to
 predatlon following thermal shock,  dependent  on  the thermal dose (temperature and
 duration) received.   The fish were  exposed to temperatures of 26, 28, and 30 C  for
 periods from 0.5 to 100 minutes. Control fish were exposed to unheated water.  Control
 and shocked fish were then reunited at  the acclimation temperature  and offered  to adult
 rainbow trout predators.  The predators were  allowed a nguriimyi of 15 minutes to remove
 about 50 percent of the prey  and the remaning test and control fish were counted.  A
 chi-square  analysis was used  on the results.  At 30 C exposure,  an  identifiable effect
 in vulnerability of the shocked fish occurred after only  0.55 «n
-------
                                                                             3.   MICROBIOLOGICAL METHODS
 "MICROBIOLOGY IN THE PHOBIC TREATMEHT OF FARM  WASTS",  Graiager,  J. M. ,  Process
 Biochemistry, Vol. 8, No.  3, March  1973, PP  26-30.

           Procedures are reviewed for the enumeration and isolation of heterotrophic
 microorganisms of aerobic  systems for treatment of  farm slurry.   The paper  is  intended
 as an  introduction to the  subject and is based  largely  on accepted microbiological
 practice.  Areas of consideration are microscopical procedures and isolation methods
 including handling of sanples,  dilution and  homogenizatlon,  nedla composition,
 inoculation methods, and teoperature and period of  Incubation.

       Ti-WJj  Farm wastes,  Waste  treatment,  Isolation,  Microblal  degradation,
       Methodology, Aerobic  treatment, Protozoa,  Enumeration, Heterotrophic  micro-
       organisms, Culture media.
"THE jeCHANIaMS OF NITROGEN ASSIMILATION IN PSEUDOMONAD3", Brown, C. M., Macdonald-BrOMi,
D. S., Stanley, 3. 0., Antonie van Leeuvenhoek, Vol.  39, No.  1,  1973, PP 89.98.
          Pseudomonas
     grovm~In
                           ginosa, Ps. fluorescens and 3 marine psychrophylic pseudomonads
 were  grovm in c hemostatTcultures with nitrate ammonia or glutamate as nitrogen source.
 In cultures grown on nitrate (either carbon- or nitrogen-limited) and In ammonia
 nitrogen-limited cultures aamonla was assimilated via the glutamine
 synthetase/L-glutamine:   2-oxoglutarate amlnotransferase (GS/GOGAT) pathway.  With an
 excess of  ammonia in the culture however ammonia was assimilated via glutamate
 dehydrogens.se  (GDH),  and glutamine synthetase (cs) was either present only at low levels
 or absent.   Two distinct GDH activities were detected in all 5 bacteria, one specific to
 NAD and one  to NADP.   The presence of these activities was determined by the environment
 in Which cells viere grovih.   These  activities showed differences with respect to
 substrate  affinity (Km values)  for ammonia, incubation temperature and to a lesser extent
 sH and may Involve separate  GDH isoenzynes.  GS from the marine bacterium PL sub 1 had s.
very high affinity for amnonia  (Km of 0.3 mM) but a low affinity for glutamate (Km of 19
mM).

IMDEX TERMS:  Nitrogen,  Aerobic bacteria,  Cultures,  Enzymes, Nitrates, Nutrient require-
      ments. Deficient elements. Environmental effects,  Assimilation, Pseudomonads,
      Substrate utilization, Enzymatic  activity.
                                                                                           AM1C-7679                            ~~     ~	~	
                                                                                           "FIXATION OF ATMOSPHERIC NITROGEN BT AZDTOBACTER SP., AND ODER HtTSROTROFHIC
                                                                                           OLIGONITROPHILOU3 BACTERIA IN THE ILAWA LAKES", Jflewolak, 3., Acta Hydrobiologiea.
                                                                                           Cracow, Vol. Ik, No. 3, 1972, PP 287-305.                     	

                                                                                                     Investigations were carried out on the distribution of bacteria fixing
                                                                                           atmospheric nitrogen in water, bottom sedlmsnts, and netplankton of the Ilawa Lakes in
                                                                                           the annual cycle, as well as on the Intensity of fixing atmospheric nitrogen in pure
                                                                                           cultures of bacteria isolated from the Lake Jezlorak.  Considerable differences were
                                                                                           noted in the development of the corresponding bacteria, according to the degree of
                                                                                           pollution or mineralization of the water, the season of the year, and the type of the
                                                                                           bottom.  The greatest quantities of bacteria fixing atmospheric nitrogen occurred in the
                                                                                           netplankton and in the bottom sediments of the Ilawa Lakes; a spring-summer maximum was
                                                                                           distinguished in their occurrence in water and bottom sediments in May or June, and an
                                                                                           autumn maximum in September and November.  Azotobacter beljerinckil No 2 and 16 fixed in
                                                                                           pure cultures the greatest quantity Of atmospheric nitrogen - up to 15.9 ng/100 ml of the
                                                                                           medium and 15.26 ng N/g of glucose.  The  yield of strains of the genus Agroraonas,  vibrio
                                                                                           Achromobacter,  Flavobacterium, and Corynebacterlum lay within the range typical of
                                                                                           ollgonltrophllous bacteria.
                                                                                           INDEX TERMS:   Nitrogen fixing bacteria,  Aquatic  bacteria,  Nitrogen fixation,  Azotobacter,
                                                                                                Bottom sediments, Hypollmnion,  Water  quality,  Spatial  distribution, Temporal
                                                                                                distribution,  Heterotrophic  bacteria. Fate of  pollutants,  Pure  cultures, Mineral-
                                                                                                ization,  Seasonal variation, Substrate utilization,  Lake Jezlorak Maly, Lake
                                                                                                Jeziorak.
                                                                                           AMIC-7905
                                                                                           "POLIOVIRUS IN A WATER SUPPLY", Vander Velde, T. L., Mack, W. N., Journal Amrlean
                                                                                           Water Works Association, Vol. 65, No. 5, May 1973, PP 3^5-31*6.
          This  is a two-part paper concerning the isolation of poliovirus from well water
in Monroe County, Michigan.  The first article considers construction of the well,
geological features of the area, and the operation from which water samples were taken.
The second article discusses laboratory and research techniques involved in the
isolation of the poliovirus.  A 5-gallon sample was taken from the well and divided into
two equal volumes.  Fifty ml of water vere removed from each sample and 10 ml were used
to seed five tubes of lauryl sulfate double-strength broth to detect conforms.   Two
samples •were concentrated on the ultracentrifuge and tested for virus on green,
African-monkey kidney-cell cultures.  A virus was isolated and Identified as poliovirus
2.  E. coll was recovered from the concentrated samples.  The tests Indicated that
viruses are viable and can survive where bacteria do not.  In this case, there was little
evidence of contamination and It required a great deal of concentration of the samples
before the coli organisms and the virus were detected.

INDEX TERMS:  Isolation, Vfeter pollution sources, Water supply,  Drainage wells,  Waste
      water (pollution), Potable water, Sewerage, Methodology,  Environmental effects,
      E. coli, Bioindleators, Pollutant identification, Poliovirus,  Culture  media.
                                                                                       50

-------
                                                                               3.   MICROBIOLOGICAL METHODS
  AMIC-791*!
  "BACTSHIAL CONTENT OF PARTICULAR MATTCB IN OFFSHORE  SURFACE WATERS", Jannasch, H. W.,
  Limnology and Oceanography, Vol. 18, Ho. 2, March  1973, pp 3UO-3U2.
  j          During  a  cruise  In  the  Sargasso  Sea,  flakelike particles swirling up with the
   surface wave's motion were encountered,  rhese  particles showed Intense iridescence and
   it required more  than an hour at  a  speed of  11-12 knots to sail out of them.  Because
  I the particles would disintegrate  with only slight disturbance of the water, they nere
  ivery difficult to sample.  Methods  were devised to obtain snail samples of small size
  : particles.  Jubsanqples were shaken  vigorously,  streaked on agar plates, membrane filtered
  ' and incubated on  the same agar medium at 22 plus or minus 1 C for k days.  The data taken
  jfrom these cultures indicated the absence  of attached bacteria and made It appear
  junlikely that the partlculate material was inhibitory to bacterial growth or attachment.
  | This was interpreted as an indication that the  particles were of relatively recent
  'origin and in a labile state.

        TE3M3:  .Jea water, Organic matter, Marine bacteria, Surface waters. Carbon, C
        Cultures, Filtration, Water sampling, Methodology, Sargasso Sea, Partlculate
        matter, Heterotrophl c bacteria, Culturing techniques, Sample preparation.
 "ATP POOLS IN PURE AND MIXED CULTURES", Kao, I. C., Chiu, 3. Y., Fan, L. T.',
 Srlckson,  L.  £.,  Journal of Water Pollution Control Federation, Vol. ^5, No. 5,
 May 1973,  PP  926-931-

            E.  eoli and Pseudomonas aeruglnosa were grown In a mixed culture for about
   nr at 30 C  with glucose as an energy source.  The same organisms were also grown
 separately in the same medium.  After recovery, washing and drying, the glucose
 concentration was determined by the glucostat method and ATP concentration by use
 of a blometer.  The  sample was prepared for ATP measurement by mixing one ml of
 lulture broth  with one ml butanol for ID sec to lyse the cells.  Eight ml of octanol
 IBS added, the sample  was vigorously shaken for 10 sec and centrifuged at 3000 rpm for
 3  min.   Butanol was poartitloned Into the top octanol layer and AIP into the bottom
 aqueous layer.  The extracted  ATP (0.01 ml) vas then injected into a lometer tube
 containing luclferln and luciferase.   The resultant light flash was converted into
 an electrical signal and then  a  decimal count representing the concentration of ATP
 in the  sample.  The fact that  the ATP concentration In the cells from the mixed
 culture was appreciably smaller  than  that in the pure cultures indicated that the
 species in the mixed culture Interact.   The fact that cell yields In mixed cultures
were far smaller than those in pure cultures also indicated the existence of such
 Interaction.

INDEX TERMS:  E.  coll,  Methodology, Monitoring,  Activated sludge, Sludge treatment,
      Efficiencies, Adenosine  trlphosphate, Pseudomonas aeruglnosa, Firefly luminescence,
      Culture  media, Lucirerin-luciferase method, Mixed cultures, Pure cultures. Species
      interaction,  Bacterial physiology.
 AMIC-7977
 "VIFUBES IK METBOPOLITAH WATERS:   CONCENTRATION BY POLYELECTROLYTES, FREEZE
 CONCENTRATION, AHD ULTRAFILTRATION", Rubenstein, E.  H., F enters, J., Ox-bach, H.,
 Shuber, H., Reed, J.,  Molloy,  E.,  Journal American Vater Works Association, Vol. 65,
 Ho. 3, March 1973, PP  20O-202.

          A  collaborative study VHS conducted to compare viral concentration
 methodologies and to elicit data related to  the viral  status  of Lake Michigan.  Ore
 laboratory  employed a  concentration method utilizing °-n Insoluble  cross-linked
 polyelectrolyte of isobutylene maleic anhydride (USA).  The second laboratory used E
 method of freeze-concentration and ultrafiltratlon.  In both  cases, experimental model
 systems,  seeded with poliovirus and echovirus,  were  Operated  In the laboratory and
 actual samples form Lake Michigan  filtration plants  and the Chicago River were tested.
 The recovery and concentration of  viruses were  shovn to be practical, simple, and
 efficient with either  method.   Both allow for the processing  of large volumes of water
 vith minimum manipulation and  a high degree  of  certainty of viral  recovery.  In the
 testing of  actual samples, no  viral agents were detected in Lake Michigan samples and
 Only one  echovirus  Isolate was yielded by Chicago Fiver samples.

 INDEX  TERMS:   Viruses, Methodology,  Lake Michigan, Concentration, Freeze concentration,
       Polyelectrolytes, Ultrafiltratlon,  Natural watere. Recovery, Sample preparation,
       Culture  media. Plaque assay,  Collaborative studies,  Coxsackle BU virus,  Echo 6
       virus, Poliovirus 1-SabIn.
AMIC-8096                                                 ~
"INFLUEHCE OF SULFIH ON GROWTH, SLIME, AND FLUORESCENT PIGMEMT FORMATION BY
PSEUDOMDKAS AERUGINOSA", Palunbo, S. A., Canadian Journal of Microbiology,  Vol.  I9f
Ho. H, April 1973, PP 505-511.

          Substitution of sulflte for sulfate In  the defined pyocyanlne medium of Frank
 and DeMoss 1959 allowed formation of fluorescent pigments and slime by Paeudomonas
 aeruginosa NRRL B-ltOlli.   This formation of fluorescent pignents was both pH and iron
 dependent.  The unadjusted medium (pH 8.25)  containing sulfite and Fe (3 plus) allowed
 both growth and fluorescent  pigment formation.   Growth and fluorescent pigment
 formation were observed from a pH of 9.0 down to a pH of 7.5.  At pH 7.5, the
 concentration of HEO3 (minus) is O.OOO6 M, and this ion appears to be the active agent
 in Inhibiting growth below pfl 7.5.   When the medium was adjusted to pH 7.0, neither
 fluorescent pigment formation nor growth was observed.  The acid used for pH adjustment
 did not influence the minimum pH for growth.  In the presence of small amounts of iron
 (ca. 1.0 mieroM Fe (3 plus)), the organism shifted from a blue to a yellow-green
 fluorescent pigment. Cultural conditions such as temperature and nutrients which
 supported growth also supported  slime formation as well as fluorescent pigment
 formation.

 HJDEX TERMS:   Cultures,  Pisnents, Growth rates.  Water pollution effects,  Sulfur compounds,
       Iron, Slime,  Incubation, Hydrogen Ion concentration,  Pseudomonas aeruginosa,
       Sulfitea,  Bacterial physiology, Fluorescent pigments.
                                                                                         51

-------
                                                                             3.  MICROBIOLOGICAL METHODS
 AMIC-8109
 "A REPORT ON BACTERIAL POLLUTION AFFECTING SHELLFISH HAHVESTIIiS IB NEWPORT
 RIVER, NORTH CAROLINA", U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, Surveillance and
 Analysis Division, Athens, Georgia, EPA Report, April 1972, 1»3 pp.  NTIS Report
 No. P3-215 291.

          An intensive bacteriological monitoring program has been conducted in
 shellfish harvesting areas of the Newport River in North Carolina.  Levels of
, bacterial Indicators in the river's estuary and tributaries are reported and where
; possible, sources of the indicators are Identified.  Two treatment plants were
' major domestic waste sources but it was determined that if they operated continuously
i at the same efficiency 99 during the study they did not pose an Immediate threat to
| shellfish growing areas.  Other sources of contamination Identified were wildlife,
| agricultural runoff, and septic tanks.  In those areas of the River classified
| for shellflshing (SA),  each station monitored was in violation Of the established
| criteria of the USPHE standard (median total collform not to exceed 70/100 ml and
 not more than 10 percent exceed an MPH of 230/100 ml).

 INDEX TERMS:   Water pollution effects, Water quality standards. Water analysis.
       Water pollution sources,  Shellfish,  *Shellfish farming,  Tributaries,  Domestic
       wastes,  Waste disposal, Conforms,  Treatment facilities, Estuaries, Waste water
       treatment,  E.  coll,  Chlorlnation, Newport River, Fecal conforms,  Fecal
       pollution,  Fecal  streptococci.
                                                                                            Amc-8158
                                                                                            "EFFECT OF DTEJ OK BACTERIAL GROWTH", Fung,  D.  Y.  C., Killer, B. D., Applied
                                                                                            Microbiology, Vol. 25, No. 5, May 1973,  PP 793-799.

                                                                                                      « rapid screening procedure was used to  test  the  effect  of U2  different
                                                                                            dyes on the growth of 30 bacteria on solid media.   ;tock solutions of each dye were
                                                                                            incorporated Into a tryptlc soy agar at  final  dilutions of  1:1000, 1:10,000, and
                                                                                            1:100,000 before sterilisation of the media  at  121 C for 15 minutes.  A  multipoint
                                                                                            inoculation device was used to transfer  broth  culture of the test  organisms onto  the
                                                                                           j agar surface.  The agar plates were inverted for incubation at  37  2 for  2k and U8 hr.
                                                                                           I They were observed under Incandescent as well  as ultraviolet light and growth was
                                                                                            recorded as positive or negative after 2k, and  W3-hr periods.   The results indicated
                                                                                            that many readily available dyes might have  potential application  for selective
                                                                                            isolation of specific bacterial groups as well  as  value  In  differentiating between
                                                                                            closely related bacterial taxa.  Separation  of  Enterobacter from Sscherlchla,
                                                                                            Salmonella from Shigella, and Staphylococcus from  Micrococeus by selected dyes was
  AKIC-8151
 "MICflCWETHOD 3YJTEM FOS IDENTIFICATION OF ANAEROBIC BACTERIA", Starr, S. E., Thompson,
 F.  3.t Dowell, V. R., Jr., Balows, A., Applied Microbiology, Vol. 25, NO. 5, May 1973,
 pp  713-717.

           H mlcrojnethod multltest system was compared with conventional tests for
 identification of anaerobic bacteria.  The mlcromethod system includes tests for neutral
 red and nitrate reduction; H23, urease, and indole production; hydrolysis of gelatin and
 esculin}  and fermentation of glucose, mannose, fructose, galactose, mannltol, lactose,
 sucrose,  maltose, sallcln, glycerol, xylose, arablnose, and starch.  All procedures vere
 conducted In an anaerobic glove box.  A total of IQlv cultures, Including 18 reference
 strains and 86 diagnostic cultures, were examined.  Ninety-one percent of the total
 tests performed vlth the two systems were In agreement.  Greater than 90 percent
 agreement between the two systems was obtained with 12 of the 17 differential tests
 ompared.   The tests for nitrate reduction and H2S production gave the poorest agreement,
 7.8 and  80.8 percent, respectively.  Only 66 percent of the 86 diagnostic cultures
 Ould be presumptively identified with the mlcronjethod system supplemented only with
microscopy and colonial characteristics.  However, when appropriate supplementary tests
and gas-liquid chromatography were used with the mlcronethod system, 85 percent of the
 6 strains could be  Identified.  When Ehrllch reagent, Instead of Kovac reagent, was
 sed with  the  mlcromethod to teat for indole, the agreement in identification was raised
 o 93 percent.

 NDEX TEHMS:   Anaerobic bacteria, Pollutant Identification, Methodology, Chemical
      reactions.  Reduction (chemical), Microjnethod system, Method evaluation,
      Comparative  tests, Culture media, Substrate utilisation, Biochemical tests,
      Bacterial physiology.	
                                                                                            also evaluated.

                                                                                            INDEX TESMS;   Dyes,  Growth rates, Analytical  techniques, Aerobic bacteria. Pollutant
                                                                                                  identification,  Biolndlcators, Cultures, Separation techniques. Pollutant effects,
                                                                                                  Bacterial physiology. Gram-positive bacteria, Gram-negative bacteria.
                                                                                           AMIC-8160
                                                                                           "METABOLIC OF HITRILOTIACETATE BY CEILS OF PSLUDOHONAS 3P3CIS3", Tiedje, J. M.,
                                                                                           Mason,  B.  B., Warren,  C.  B., Malec, E. J., Applied Microbiology, Vol. 95, No. 5,
                                                                                           May  1973,  pp 8ll~8l6.

                                                                                                     A Pseudomonas species was Isolated from soil which could degrade
                                                                                           nltrilotrlacetate  {NTA) to COS, H20, NH3, and cellular constituents without the
                                                                                           accumulation of  significant quantities of intermediates either In ths presence or
                                                                                           absence of several Inhibitors.  After extensive gas chromatography analysis, small
                                                                                           quantities of aspartate,  glyelne, and aconltate were the only detectable compounds to
                                                                                           accumulate during  NTA  degradation, and these compounds were not excreted from the cells.
                                                                                           Manometric studies indicated that imlnodlacetate, glycine, and glyoxylate are possible
                                                                                           intermediates, whereas N-methyllminodiacetate, sarcosine, and acetate are not.  The data
                                                                                           are consistent with an oxidative cleavage of the C-N bond of KTA as the initial
                                                                                           degradation step.   The finding that NTA is readily oxidized to inorganic products and
                                                                                           that no intermediates  accumulated under a variety of conditions indicates that
                                                                                           environmental concern  for hazardous Intermediates in NTA degradation seens unwarranted.

                                                                                           INDEX TERMS:  Sitrllo-trlacetlc acid, Pseudomonas, Pollutant Identification, Metabolism,
                                                                                                Mlcroblal  degradation, Soil bacteria,  Surfactants,  Aerobic bacteria, Detergents,
                                                                                                Fate  of pollutants, Degradation products,  Substrate utilization, Scintillation
                                                                                                counting.
                                                                                       52

-------
                                                                              3.   MICROBIOLOGICAL METHODS
  AMIC-6162
               iKF3CT3 OF FH,
                                     TJSz;, AND 3AL.T CONCENTRATION OK CBiOVfTH AND SURVIVAL
                               Beuchat, L. S., Applied Microbiology, Vol. 25, No. %
            r:.«mal reMJtnnce and minimal pH and temperature conditions for growth of
  Vibrio parnhaemcLytlcuS in artificial media containing J and 7 percent sodium chloride
  «erc studied.  Growth wa3 obser/ed at pH It.9 and at 5 C.  To study thermal resistance a
  0.3-tal portion of a 21— h culture was dispensed Into tutes containing 19.7 nil of
 i Trypticase soy broth with 3 percent HaCl which had been tendered at 53 plus or minus 0.2
 1 C (126 F) In a water bat:-,.  Heating menstrua had been adjusted to pH values ranging
 , from 5.0 to ft.O in 0.5-unit increments.  Samples were withdrawn, and dilutions were made
 i inroediately by using a 3 percent NaCl in -water diluent before plating In TSA with 3
 | percent NaCl tempered at 1*5 C.  Recovery was at 37 C, and counts w*re made after 21* h of
  Incubation.  Extensive growth at 5 c vas not observed at the pH values examined; no
  growth was observed at 2 C.  Grovth at 5 and 9 C was only at an alkaline pH.  There was a
  tendency for growth at lower pH's as the Incubation temperature 1*13 Increased, regardless
  of  Kaci concentration.   With the exception of strain ^750, V. parahaemolyticus was
  demonstrated to grow at lover pH values in the T3B with 3 percent MsCl at pH U.8 when
  Incubation was at 30 C, the lowest pH tolerance observed In the study.  The six strains
  were least sensitive to heat at pH 7.0 and most sensitive at pH 5.0.

  INDEX TimJ:   Growth rates, Hydrogen ion concentration, Temperature, Sodium chloride,
       riivironmental effects. Heat resistance, 3alt tolerance, Enteric bacteria,  Patho-
       genic bacteria,  Survival, Vibrio parahaemolytlcus, Chemical concentration.
 AMIC-817U
 "JUHVIVaL OK JALHOlfclX,.  TYPHTMURJ'JM IK ANIMAL MANURE DISPOSAL IN A MODEL OXIDATION
 DITCH", Will, L. A., Dlesch,  o.  L., Pomeroy,  B.  3., American journal of Public Health,
 Vol. 63, No. k, ,4prll  1973, PP  322-326.

           A laboratory model  oxidation ditch  was constructed to evaluate potential
 health effects of pathogens In  cattle  manure. The studies were conducted In a 1:10
 scale model with pH, DO, temperature,  and total  solids regulated to simulate a field.
 unit at summer (SO C)  and winter (e c) temperatures.  Liquid manure obtained from a
 field ditch was placed In the laboratory ditch.   Stock cultures of biologically and
 serologlcally pure Salmonella typhlmurlum were grown on tryptlc soy agar and seeded Into
 the  ditch.   Various cultural methods «ere used In measuring survival and dlfferention
 was  accomplished both biochemically and serologlcally.  At sumuer temperatures
 3. typhlmurlum survived for 17 days post-seeding and at winter conditions for U7 days.
 Fhe'data Indicated that survival  vas of greatest duration in the sludge portion of
 settling chambers.   Attests were made during the tests to use fluorescent antibody
methods  for measurement but these were not as successful as anticipated.  Retrieval of
 'luoreacent organisms from the enrichment phase  media was more successful than
sampling directly  from the oxidation ditch manure.

INDEX TERMS'  Pollutant Identification,  Farm  wastes, Oxidation lagoons, Model studies.
      Wast*  disposal,  Public health, Biochemistry, Survival, Salmonella typhlmurlum,
      Fluorescent antibody techniques. Biochemical tests, Fecea.
 AMC-6191
 "COUPCHMS, FECAl COLIFORHS, AMD FSCAL  STREPTOCOCCI  Ai  IKD1CATCR3 OF WATSS POLLUTION",
 Cohen,  J., Shvual,  H.  I.,  Hater, Air, and Joll  Pollution, Vol. 2, No.  1, March 1973,
 PP
          The presence  and survival  of coliforns,  fec«l  collforms,  and  fecal  streptococci
 were  Studied under  various ecological  renditions (sewage  '../-eatjnent  £lar,-,z,  heavily
 polluted rivers, a  lake and other  drinking water sources) an2  their relative  .'nportance
 as pollution indicators, especially  of viral  pollution,  was exaininea  fur each t,ype  of
 water system examined.   Grab samples were taken with  sterile containers, fll'-Ted,  and
 the bacteria were cultured.  Collforn  bacteria were cultured on m-5ndo  media  (Dlfco)
 and counted after 2k  hr Incubation at  35 C.   Fecal conforms were Incubated on M-PC
 broth (Dlfco) for 3k  hr in a water bath at W*.5 C.  Fecal streptococci  were incubated
 for U hr at 35 C followed by V*  hr at  M.J C  to eliminate the  growth  of atypical
 mlcrocolonles.  In  all  cases the fecal streptococci were generally  more resistant to the
 natural water environment and to purification processes  than the other  Indicator
 organisms and, at points distant from  the original source of pollution  were often the
 only  Indicators of  the  feca]  nature  of the pollution.  In two  of the  systems  studied th*
 survival of the fecal streptococci paralleled the  survival of  enteric viruses better than
 the collforms.  The fecal streptococci nay thus in certain cases provide a  setter
 estimate of the probable vims content In lightly contaminated water  than the other two
 Indicators.

 IMDSX TBRH5:  Conforms,  Blolndlcators, viruses, 'Water pollution, Sewage treitment,
      Treatment facilities, Potable water, Lakes, Rtvers, ChlorlnaUon, 2ff Iclenciea,
      Enteric bacteria,  Fecal conforms, Fecal streptococci, Pseal  pollution.
AMIC-8a07
"HerHYLMERCUiff:  BACTERIAL DEGRADATION IN LAKE JiDIKEHT.'j", jpangler, W. J.,
J. L., Rose, J. M., Miller, H. M., Science, Vol. 180, No. UO82, April 13, 1973,
pp 19S-193.

          Long-term Incubation studies were carried out on the blomethylatlon of
mercury in sediments taken froo the delta area of the St. Clalr -River, Michigan.
Various combinations of growth media and gaseous atmospheres were used in an effort to
Identify organisms or groups of organlans capable of methylatlng Hg.  During the first
50 days of a long-term period, of incubation of lake sediments with Inorganic mercury
(Hg (2 plus)), lov concentrations of methylmercury were observed to build up.  Upon
continued incubation there was a rapid decrease in amount of methylmercury in the system
and a concomitant evolution of volatile inorganic mercury (Hg).   Transfer of the mixed
culture to growth media containing racthylnercury resulted in the degradation of
methylmercury and the volatilisation of Hg.  Four bacterial isolates were obtained fron
the mixed culture which, In pur* culture, rapidly degraded methylnercury to  methane and
Hg.  The presence of methane lu head space gases was confirmed by flams  ionlaatlon gas
chroniatography, and the presence of Hg in head space gases was confirmed by  mass
speetrometry.

INDEX TERMS:   Mlerohlal degradation, Lake sediments,  Aquatic  bacteria. Mercury,
      Pseudomonas, Methylatlon,  MethylnBrcury, Fate of pollutants,  Pure  cultures,
      Volatilization, St.  Clalr  River,  Mixed cultures,  Degradation  products,  .jubstrate
      utilization.
                                                                                         53

-------
                                                                              3.  MICROBIOLOGICAL METHODS
 AKIC-82l*8
 "FATTY ACID COMPOSITIONS OF PAHAC01DN3:   ARIZONA,  CITaOBACTSR, AND PflOVIDENCIA",
 Machtlger,  N.  A.,  O'Leary,  W. M.,  Journal of Bacteriology,  Vol. llU, No.  1, April
 1973,  PP 30-85.

           The  f a ty acid compositions of stationary-phase cultures of Arizona
 arlzonae, Cltrobucter freundli,  Provldencia alealifaciens,  Providencia stuartli,  and
 Providencia sp.  were  studied.All organisms were  grovn in  chemically defined media.
 -Stationary-phase cells were narvested by centrifugation at  3200 times g for 2O mln at
 ^ C, washed once in distilled water,  and recentrlfuged.   The cell pastes were
 lyophillzed, weigried  and growth  was measured turbidimetrically at 600 nm.   Total
 cellular fatty acids  were extracted from dry cells, methylated, and analyzed by
 dual-column, dual  flane ioniiation ga.s chromatography,   The major fatty acids of  A.
 arlzonae, £. freungil,  and  Provideneia were 16:0,  16:1,  17:cyclopropane,  and     ~"
 19: cyclopropane^  The  fatty ncld compositions of the  two strains of A. arlzonae
 examined nere  similar  tc each other,  but the three strains  of C. freundll  differed
 from one another In their fatty  acid  congest tlons.  In both A. arlaonae~and C.
 freundii, the  relative  quantities  of  saturated, unsaturated,"and cyclopropane" fatty
 acids were  similar to  those whic-.  have been found  in  stationary-phase cultures of
 other members  of the Enterobacteriaceae.  The three strains of Prpyldencla also
 differed from  one  another In their fatty acid compositions.   In all three  strains the
 total quantity of  unsaturated fatty acids was larger and that of the cyclopropane
 fatty acids  vias  smaller  than those found  in stationary-phase cultures of cither enteric
 bacteria.

 INDEX TSrtMi:  Enteric bacteria, Conforms,  Arizona arlzonae, Citrobacter freundii,
       Provldencia alealifaciens, Provldencia stuartii, Fatty acids,  Chemical  composition.
 AMIC-8250
 "MCTHANOL METABOLISM IN P3SUDOMOHAD C", Stieglitz, B., Mateles, R.
 Bacteriology, Vol. llU, No. 1, April 1973, PP 390-39S.
Journal of
           Cell suspensions of pseudomonad C, a bacterium capable of growth on nethanol
 as sole carbon source, were able to oxidize methanol, formaldehyde, and formate,
 although the rates of oxidation for the latter two compounds were much slower.  The
 latter compounds also could not serve as sole carbon sources.  Through the use of
 labeled compounds, It vas shown that In the presence of nethanol, formaldehyde, formate,
 and bicarbonate were Incorporated into trlchloroacetic acld-precipitable material.
 Hexose  phosphate synthetase activity was found, Indicating the assimilation of methanol
 via an  allulose pathway.   No hydroxypyruvate reductase activity was found, nor was any
 complex membrane structure observed.  Such a. combination of characteristics has been
observed  in  an obligate methylotroph [ Psuedomonas Wl), but pseudomonad C can utilize a
variety of non-methyl substrates.

 INDEX TERMS:  Metabolism,  Pseudoroonas,  Radioactivity techniques, Nutrient requirements,
      Assay, Enzymes,  Carbon radio!sotopes, Methanol, Substrate utilization, Fate of
      pollutants,  Bacterial physiology, Pseudomonads, Methanol dehydrogenase, Enzymatic
      activity, C-l1*,  Assimilation.
                    AMIC-6272
                    "METABOLISM OF EHDOTHAU, BY AQUATIC MICaOOHGANI315", Slkka, H. C., Saxena, J.,
                    Journal of fvgricultural and Food Chemistry, Vol. 21, No 3, May/Jure 1973, pp
                              (C-lU)£ndothflll (7-oxabicyclo(?.?.l)r:ept.a!«-2,3-d;c!ir[>r,xyHc acid) labeled
                    In the oxabicycio ring was readily degraded by n-.icrocrganiso; In lake water ajnd
                    hydrosoil through a pathway Involving splitting of trie ring.  An Arthroba.-:erliiients with Echo 6 virus.  In this instance, cold temperature per se
                   appeared more effective In enhancing survival time.  Inactlvation rate was gradual and
                   the virus persisted for Ik weeks at 38 F - kQ F, contrasted sharply with an 8-day
                   persistence at an environmental temperature of 72 F.

                   INDEX TERMS:  Sea water. Persistence, E. coli. Environmental effects, Snterlc bacteria.
                         Survival, Echo 6 virus, Culture media. Enrichment, Snterovlrus, Cell morphology.
SeTTlso:   Category 1, AMIC-7132, 7763
            Category 2, AMIC-7929, 7948, 7979,  8106.

-------
                                                                        4.  METHODS AND PERFORMANCE EVALUATION
AMK-79^2
"WPCF PROJECT REPORT:  A STATE CERTIFICATION PROGRAM GUIDE", Guy, L. L., Jr., Burke,
G. W., Jr., Brlnck, C. W., Journal Water Pollution Control Federation. Vol. 1*5, No. 5,
May 1973, PP 737-908.

         A study was conducted by WPCF, supported by an EPA grant, of state programs for
certification of operations personnel In vnstewater facilities.  Six states were visited
and the others polled for ficts and opinions on key Issues.  The project report Included
the findings and conclusions of the study and recommended actions for federal and state
agencies.  A 'State Certification Program Guide* is presented that attempts to describe
the elements of an effective state program.  The states are encouraged to coordinate
their efforts,  and particular attention is directed toward (a) adequate autonomy and
budget, (b) separate certification from training, (c) broader coverage of personnel and
facilities, (d) development of a sound classification system,  (e) separate certification
for industrial  waste facilities, and (f) easier reciprocity among state programs.

      TERMS:  Waste water treatment, Administration,  Personnel, Training,  Operations,
      Classification,  Education, Regulation,  Water quality control, Water  pollution
      control,  Certification programs,  Examination, Certification renewals,
      Certification criteria.
 AHIC-a026
 "COLLABORATIVE STUDY OF THE NONAQUEOUS COPPER COLORIMETRIC AND SILVER TITRIMETRIC
 METHODS FOR THE DETERMINATION OF MALATHION IN TECHNICAL GRATE MALATHION AND IN
 MALATHIOB FORMULATION", Wayne, R. S., Journal of the Association of Official
 Analytical Chemists, Vol. 56, "o. 3, May 1973, PP 579-5»5.

          The nonaqueous copper eolorlmetrlc and the silver tltrimetrlc methods for the
 determination of malathion were studied collabormtlvely.  The study Involved wettable
 powders,  emulsiflable concentrates, dusts, and the technical grade product.  The mean
 of  nil  of the results Indicates that "both procedures will give comparable values for
 each  sample type used In the study.  Agreement between replicates in Individual
 laboratories was excellent.   Agreement between laboratories was satisfactory;
 coefficients of  variation ranged from 1.3 to 1*.8 percent for the samples studied.  The
 2 methods offer  improved reliability and ease of operation when compared to the
 official  first action colorimetric method, 6.265-6.269.  The methods have been adopted
as official  first action.

INDEX TERMS:   Methodology, Chemical analysis. Reliability, Collaborative studies.
      Method evaluation, Comparative tests,  Standard methods. Coefficient of variation,
      Intel-laboratory tests.
                                                                                           AMIC-8200
                                                                                           "SCME PROBLEMS ASSOCIATED WITH THE ANALYSIS OF MULTIRESPOHSE DATA",  Box,  G.  E.  P.,
                                                                                           Hunter, W. G., McGregor, J. F., Erjavec, J.,  Technometrics, Vol.  15,  No. 1,
                                                                                           February 1973, PP 33-51.

                                                                                                    Experience has shown that unless special cire Is exercised  in 
-------
                                                                              5.  INSTRUMENT DEVELOPMENT
 A me -6952
  "REAL-TllC INTERACTIVE IHSTRlffCNttTIOH",  Jones, D.  0.,  Furdue University,  Lafayette,
  Indium, Dissertation Abstracts Ho.  73-611*2,  1970,  167  Pp.   (Complete report not
            from AM1C.)
           The work presented In this thesis considers the critical experimental design
  parameters elucidated by a software -oriented study and describes the translation to
 ! hardware-oriented instrumentation.   The hardware device was  evaluated experimentally
 ! in the laboratory and the capabilities compared  to the «rftimr«~B*nermted
 : experimentation.   Results indicate  the essentially Identical analytical performance la
 1 achieved at greatly reduced complexity   iN A tCMOOT TEST SySTEM", Connolly, J. J., Rosenbaum, M.,
Computer Design. Vol. 12, Mo. 2, February 1973, PP 86, 88, 89.
          A low repetition rate digital sampling system Is described In which a
 buffer storage unit provides a reduction in data rate so that digital sample* nay
 be processed and analyzed by an on-line computer.  This computer nay be either a
 apodal-purpose digital processor, or a general-purpose device wherein digital flata
 sample analysis is accomplished by means of a software program.  A block diagram la
 given of the memory data gathering system using an A J3 converter.  This system will
 take  five samples of the aense amplifier output at 50-n» Intervals, convert the
 analog value of each sample to a 6-blt digital number, and place these numbers In
 five  storage buffers.   The converter has a sampling rate capability of up to 20
 million samples/a,  accuracy of plus or minus 0.8 percent FS plus or minus 1/2 ISB,
 a»d Is  m compatible.   A U-blt delay code defines the 100-ns multiple that must
 elapse  after acceptance of an external convert command before actual sampling of the
 sense amplifier output  Signal begins.

IHDEX TEHM5J  Data  transmission.  Data processing. Digital computers. Automation,
      Instrumentation,  Mechanical equipment,  Automatic control. Analog to digital
      converters, Digital sampling systems,  On-line computers, Buffer memory systems,
      Data gathering systems,  Computer memory.
 AMIC-7'»6S
 "A WaOD FOR HIGH SPEED BCD-TO-BIlttlW COHVEBSION", BeOugaer, L. C., Computer Design.
 Vol. 12, Ho.  3, March 1973, PP 53-59.

          n»e  BCD-to-binary design proposed as a  high  speed  coded number converter
 can translate an 8-diglt BCD number into a 27-bit binary  number In 60 ns.  The
 method is Sufficiently fast to ccaplete the process within  one computer memory cycle
 of any available digital computer.   High speed conversion of the number provide*
 assurance that the Input data to the computer will be In  binary form at any time
 computer instruction? request It.   The design architecture  wafi Implemented using
 Schotthy-clomped TTL integrated circuits.   A  less costly  configuration can be
 obtained by using standard TTL Integrated circuits aueh »  the 7**lBl arithmetic logic
 unit and T'tlSe carry-look-abead generator but results In  a  sacrifice of conversion
 speed.   When  standard TTL logic circuits are  used, the converter can be expected to
 convert an 8-digit BCD number into  a 27-bit binary number in approximately 150 ns,
 which Is sufficiently fast for many applications  and  provides a saving of initial
 component costs.

 INDEX TE3et   Methodology, Digital  computers, BCD to binary conversions, Conversion
       systems, Computer memory. Converters.
                                                                                           "BOOST A/D RA-ffiS WITH STAGGEfED OFERATIOH"
                                                                                           So. It, February 15, 1973, PP 5*»-57.
                                            Baluta, H.,  Electronic Design, Vol.  21,
         The operation of two Interleaved a/d converters is discussed In order to
clarify the details of Interface circuit requirements vereus the number of converters
used.  Conversion speed Is doubled by the Interconnection of two converters; however,
external timing constraints limit the attainable speeds.

IKDEX IEFM5:  Design criteria, Rates, Interfaces,  Timing,  Design standards, Velocity,
      Digital to analog converters, Conversion speed,  Timing constraints.

-------
                                                                              5.   INSTRUMENT DEVELOPMENT
 Mac-7895
 "AT-ETIEAM-VEUXITY RJMPIBC SEDIMENT SAMPLING SYSTEM", Bennett, J. P., Journal of the
 Hydraulics Division. Proceedings of the American Society of Civil Engineers. Vol. 99,
 No. HV6, June 1973, pp 873-8677

          The sampling system collects water-sediment samples at local stream velocity
 from any point In an open-channel flow.  The system used a flow-through Pitot tube as a
1 combination velocity sensor and sampler nozzle.  He main advantage of the sampling
, system over existing suspended-sediment samplers such &E the US-P series »ampleri Is
! that a sample of any desired volume can be collected without changing the position of
 the sampler nozzle.  To compare the performance of the system with that of other
i samplers, suspended-sediment samples were collected trot a flat-bed flow using the
1 system, a US DH-'i8 sampler modified for point sampling, and a siphon sampler.  On the
[ basis of these samples, at the 99 percent confidence level, the relative percent
j difference between the concentrations of the samples from the system and the siphon
j sampler was between -5-l»5 and k.k^ and the relative percent difference between the
' concentrations of the samples from the system and from the US DHJ*8 was b«tve«& -0.5*1
| and 7.78.

 INDEX TEfMS:   Open channel flow,  On-site data collections.  Sediment-water interfaces,
       Calibrations,  Construction,  Operation and maintenance,  Bottom sampling,
       Instrumentation,  Sediment transport,  Hydraulics,  On-slte Investigations,
       Methodology, Equipment,  Sediment sampling system. Automatic  samplers,  Suspended
       sediments,  Performance evaluation,  Accuracy.
                                                                                            AMIC-7988
                                                                                            "SODIUM TUNGSTEN BROHZE AS A POTEMTIOMETRIC IMDICATIHO ELECTRODE FOR DISSOLVED OXYGEN
                                                                                            IK AQUEOUS SOLUTION11, Hahn, P. B.,  Wechter, M.  A.,  Johnson,  D.  C.,  Volgt, A. F.,
                                                                                            Analytical Chemistry, Vol. 1»5, No.  7,  June 1973,  PP 1016-1021.

                                                                                                     Sodium tungsten bronzes,  nonstolchionetrlc compounds,  N
-------
                                                                              5.   INSTRUMENT DEVELOPMENT
 AMC-8167
  "OIL SPILL SURVEILLANCE  SYSTEM STUD!?", Mohr, D., MeCormack,  K.,  Brevster, G.,
  Fournler, G., Texas  Instruments Incorporated, Dallas, Texas,  Report Ho. EPAJte-73-
  215,  Contract No. 68-01-0150,  May  1973, 215 pp.
           Test studies  of active  and passive Infrared  sensor systems were conducted  to
 determine the ability  of these systems to detect petroleum  oil  on the water's  surface.
 Since there are temperature, as  well as emlssivlty differences  between oil and Hater,
I It was expected that these  systems  might have applications  for  real time detection,
| alarm,  monitoring, and recording of oil spilled Or discharged In  waters.  The  active
 system emits  a wide-band IR pulse and receives reflections  at two narrow spectral bands.
| It« operation Is based on differences In the reflectance of oil and water at these
 narrow spectral bands.   The passive system receives IR radiation  In the 8- to  lA-micron
 spectral  region.  The  test  results  indicate that both sensor systems have distinct
 advantages In oil spill  surveillance applications.  The active  sensor provides absolute
 oil spill detection, for ranges  to  300 feet that Is not affected by the time of day,
 weather,  or water surface conditions.  The passive sensor makes possible oil volume
 determination, sreal coverage, and  probable oil detection for ranges to 1000 feet.
 Since both evaluated sensor systems have distinct and equally Important features, a
 combination active and passive sensor system vould provide  the best surveillance for
 oil spill applications.  Two combination system designs are described In this report.

 INDEX TERM3:   Oil spills, Remote sensing,  Pollutant identification, Water pollution
       sources, Monitoring,  Optical properties,  Infrared sensors, Surveillance, Infrared
       Imagery.
 AMIC-8aC*
 "A HUGGED SILVER-SILVER CHLORITE  ELECTROEE FOR  FIELD USE", Contl, U., Corwln,
 R. F.,  The Review of Scientific Instruments, Vol. Ufc, No. 6, June 1973, pp 708-711.

          A rugged silver-silver chloride  electrode has been developed and used
 successfully In a variety of field applications.  The electrode housing is made of
 2.51* cm o.d.  clear acrylic plastic rod.   The filling solution is 2.7 M potassium
 chloride saturated with silver chloride,  and contact with the external medium is
 made through a  porous ceramic rod.  Results of  laboratory and field tests measuring
 the response of the electrode to  chemical, thermal, mechanical, and electrical
 disturbances are presented.  The  electrode has  provided reliable service when
 subjected to severe mechanical abuse during both offshore and onshore use.

 INDEX TERMS:  On-site data collections, Electrochemistry, ReBisltivlty, Salinity,
      Reliability,  Temperature, Design, On board analysis, Marine environment,
      Silver/silver chloride  electrode, Electrochemical behavior, Ion selective
      electrodes,  Shipboard measurements, Mechanical shock.
 AKIC-8191*
 "FIELD CALIBRATION AMD EVALUATION OF A NUCLEAR SEDIMENT GAGE", Welch, M. H.,  Allen,
 P.  B., Water Resources Research, Vol. 9,  No.  1, February 1973j PP IS^-ISB.

          Nuclear sediment gage readings were  compared to stream cross-sectional
 sediment concentrations for several storm events over a 3-year period.  Calibration
 curves, developed toy least-squares analysis,  are presented, for individual and combined
 storm events. Correlation coefficients for Individual or combined storm events
 ranged fron -0.86 to -0-99,  and all were  significant at the 1 percent level.
 Standard errors  of estimate  ranged from plus  or minus 172 to plus or minus  1884 ppm.
 Sediment concentrations predicted with the calibration curves developed In  this
 study  were accurate enough for moat applications. Although the particular  nuclear
 gage used in this study is probably unsatisfactory for general use,  the principle of
 nOTiltoring sediment concentrations by nuclear techniques appears sound and  feasible.

INIEX TERMS:  Calibrations,  On-slte investigations.  Monitoring, Evaluation, Instrument*.
      tlon,  On-slte testa, On-slte data collections. Sediments, least squares method,
      Radioactivity techniques,  Nuclear sediment gage,  Suspended sediments, Correlation
      coefficients.  Standard errors,  Accuracy,  Half-life.
                                                                                       Iff
AMIC-8208
"ENZYME ELECTROteS", Gough, D. A., Andrade, J. D., Science, Vol. 180, No. VOBk,
April 27, 1973, PP 3&0-38U.

         The development of biochemical-specific electrode systems is discussed] sane
of the foreseeable problems that might be associated with their use are presented; and
the essential literature is reviewed.  It was determined that the clinical determinations
of certain metabolites and soluble enzymes by means of enzyme electrodes are quite
feasible.  Such devices may be made highly specific by the use of appropriate enzymes
and a high degree of accuracy can be obtained.  Instantaneous and continuous
etdeterminations can be made from physiological fluids,  and undesirable physiologic
responses can theoretically be minimized, thus making long-term clinical monitoring a
possibility.  Enzyme electrodes may also have a useful lifetime and meet other practical
requirements.

INDEX TERMS:  Monitoring, Methodology,  Pollutant identification,  Chemical reactions.
      Properties, Electrochemistry, Enzymes,  Amino acids,  Ureas,  Metabolites,
      Potenticmetry, Immobilized enzyme electrodes,  Electrochemical behavior,  Glucose,
      Response time.

-------
                                                                              5.  INSTRUMENT DEVELOPMENT
 AMtC-8211*
  "POLARIZATION:
                 A KEY TO AN AIRBORNE OPTICAL SYS1EM  FOB THE  rEIECTIOH OF OIL ON WAIEF"
 milird, J.  P., Arvesen, J. C., Science, Vol. 180, No.  1*091, June 1973, PP 1170-1171.

          The detection of  oil  slicks  can be  Improved by utilizing polarization
 techlnques.  Good contrast was obtn-tned In a study of oil  slicks  by viewing a  specific
 polarization component.  Skylight polarization, which varies with the position of the
 sun  In the sky, Influences the contrast of oil on water.  Good contrast Is  most
I consistently obtained by viewing in azimuth directions  toward or  away from  the eun.
| Contrast is  enhanced by imaging selected polarization components  and by taking the
' difference between orthogonal  polarization components.

! INDEX TERMS:  Oil spills, Aerial photography, Remote sensing, Water pollution, Pollutant
!       Identification, Oil pollution, Reflectance, Optical properties, On-slte data
I       collections, Cameras, Thin films, Photograrametry, Aerial surveillance, Skylight
'       polarization, Optical systems, Polarization, Azimuths.
 AMIC-8237
 "ION-SELECTIVE CAHBON-PAS1E ELECTRODES FOR HALITES AND SILVER (I)  IONS",  Mesarlc,  S.t
 Dahmen, E. A. M. F., Analjrtlca Chlmlca Acta,  Vol.  6U,  Ko.  3,  May 1973,  pp USl-USS.

          The behavior of a simple type of Ion-selective electrode  for halogens and
 sliver has been studied.  The electrode consists of a  plastic body filled with carbon
 paste, the surface of which can be easily renewed.  The paste composition Is based on
 carbon-nujol (5: 1,  w/v) or carbon-paraffin was  (3:  1(  w/w) containing  a  prepared
 mixture of silver hallde-sllver sulphide (1-30 percent).   The electrodes  hive  low  ohmic
 resistance and show a rapid Nernstian response (within 2-5 mV) for hallde and  silver
 ions down to 0.05 mM chloride,  0.01 mM bromide and 0.5 mlcroM Iodide  with the  respective
 electrodes.   Ions forming very  stable complexes  with halide or silver and those having
 strong oxidizing or  reducing action Interfere.

 INDEX T£FM5:   Halldes,  Cations,  Aqueous solutions,  Fabrication,  Silver  Iodide,
       Measurement, Sliver,  Ion  selective electrodes, Carbon paste  electrodes,
       Potentiometric  tltratlon,  Sliver chloride, Sliver bromide, Potentioiaetry,
       Chemical interference,  Detection llalts.
AMIC-8235
"A  POTASSIUM-SELECTIVE  SILICONE-RUBBER MEMBRANE ELECTRODE BASED OK A NEUTRAL CARRIER",
Pick,  J., Toth,  K.,  Pungor,  E., Analytlca Chtmica Acta, Vol. 6^, Mo. 3f  *y 1973,
pp  U77J*ao.

          A new potassium-selective silicon*-rubber membrane electrode based on the
neutral carrier  vallnomycin  has been developed.   The electrode selectivity for most
alkali and alkaline  earth metal cations Is comparable to that of the conventional
liquid membrane  electrodes.   Over a period of 65 h no drift In e.m.f. was observed.
The response time usually IE less than 3 s.

INDEX TERJC:  Selectivity, Cations,  Aqueous solutions,  Alkali metals, Alkaline earth
      metals, Ion selective  electrodes,  Membrane electrodes,  Potassium electrodes,
      Uganda, Vallnomycln, Electrochemical  behavior. Electromotive force. Response time,
      Feproduclbllity, Ionic  interference.
AMIC-8238
"THE CALIBRATION AND RESPONSE OF ION-SELECTIVE ELECTRODES AT LOW CONCENTRATIONS OF
PRIMAJW IOMS". Bailey, P. L., Pungor, E., Analytlca Chlmiea Actft, Vol. 6U, No. 3,
May 1973, PP ^23-1*30.

         The responses of silleone-rubber based Ion-selective membrane electrodes  (iodide
and silver ion-selective electrodes) to lov concentrations of primary ions have been
studied in various unbuffered media.  In particular, the failure region of the electrodes
was studied.  Reproducible and accurately known concentrations of tons (0.1-0.0007 mM)
were prepared by electrolytic generation.  A necessary and integral part of the vork was
to measure the current efficiency for the generation of the Ions In the different  media.
Such efficiencies were measured coulometrically.  Results obtained from the calibration
of the iodide-ion selective electrode in various media are presented,  and results  with
the silver and copper Ion-selective electrodes are briefly discussed.   The advantages of
the electrolytic generation technique are discussed.

IHEEX TERM5:  Calibrations,  Jtethodology, Electrolytes,  Electrochemical behavior, Ion
      selective electrodes,  Copper electrodes,  Silver electroded,  Iodide  electrodes,
      Unbuffered media, fieproduclbillty. Accuracy,  Electrolytic  generation technique,
      Current efficiencies.
                                                                                        59

-------
                                                                               5.  INSTRUMENT DEVELOPMENT
   A MIC-82 39
   "RECENT RESULTS ON THE DYNAMIC RESPONSE OF PRECIPITATE.BASED  ION-SELECTIVE  ELECTRODES",
   Toth,  K., Pungor, E., Anilytica Chlmlea Acts. Vol. 6k, No. 3, May  1973,  pp  klT-USl.

            Phe e.m.f. vs. time curves of the precipl tate-tesed  Ion-selective  electrodes
   ( copperfIIJ-selective electrode) hive b^en Interpreted matheraatically  on the  basis of
   the  desolvation of ions at the electrode surface.  A new method has been suggested
 I  for  the characterization of Ion-selective electrodes by the half-life  time  of the
   first-order  desolvatlon reaction.

   INDEX TERMS:  Mathematical studies,  Chemical reactions, Methodology, Desolvation,  Ion
 j       selective electrodes,  Electrochemical behavior, Data interpretation,  Copper
 j       electrodes,  Response time,  Characterization, Half-life, Electromotive force.
 i
 AMIC-8280
 "AN ON-SITE HYD.TOLOGJC DATA RECORDING SYSTEM", Chadwick, D. G., Water Resources Bulletin,
 Vol. 9, No. 2, April 1973, PP 328-337.
          A system is described which has the capability to operate unattended for long
 periods of time,  reliably sensing and digitizing hydrologlc data at predetermined
 Intervals for data transmission or storage as the case  requires.  Little power Is
 needed for system operation in the standby mode.  Batteries supply what energy is
 required for operation,  so it can be used in places located remotely from a 60 Hz
 power source.  A  description is given of methods used to sense and digitize data taken
 from a precipitation gage,  temperature probe, wind direction,  Indicator, wind mill
 sensor, and water level  sensor.  The system Is periodically actuated by an extremely
 accurate solid-state crystal clock.  The record is made on an 8-channel battery operated
 paper-tape punch.  The system has flexibility for measuring many other parameters.  The
 overall system has an idefinltely long life, it being primarily determined by the
 ultimate wear-out  of the  paper tape punch which of course Is replaceable.  Other elements
are  essentially nonwearlng and should last indefinitely.   About 25 dollars worth of
 >atterles will power the  system up to 2 years depending on the amount of data to be
recorded.

INDEX  TERMS:   Hydrologic  data,  Automatic control, Instrumentation, On-slte data collec-
       tions.  Data storage and  retrieval, Recording systems,  Sensors.
 AMIC-8318
 "REMOTE SENSING STUDY OF  THERMAL DISCHARGES TO LAKE MICHIGAN, WISCONSIN,  ILLIHOIS,
 INDIANA, MICHIGAN", U. S. Environmental Protection Agency, National Field
 Investigations Center, Denver, Colorado, Presented at the Fourth Session  of the Lake
 Michigan Enforcement Conference, September 1972, 36 pp.   NTTS Report No.  FS-2lk 503.

          An aerial reconnaissance study was conducted along the shoreline of lake
 Michigan including 13 electric power generating facilities, 10 of which were operating
 at the time of the flight.  Thermal data were recorded on an Infrared line  scanner
 (IRLS) with a temperature resolution of 0.1 C.  The instrument recorde/i only surface
 water temperature.  Recorded data were on 5-inch film in  the form of a thermal map.
 Nine of the operating power stations were found to  be violating the recommended 3 F
 maximum temperature increase at a distance of 1000  feet from the discharge point.   Six
 were violating the 3 F recommendation even at 2000  feet.  However,  none of the discharges
 caused surface temperature to exceed the  maximum allowable for September  of 80 F.
 Overlapping thermal plumes were also recorded, which was in violation of
 recommendations.

 INDEX TERMS:   Remote sensing,  Thermal pollution, Lake Michigan,  Electric powerplants,
       Water pollution sources,  Industrial wastes, Water temperature, Happing,  Infrared
       radiation,  Photogrammetry, Michigan, Illinois, Indiana, Wisconsin, Water pollution,
       Surface waters,  Aerial surveillance, Infrared Imagery, Line scanning,  Lake
       Winnebago,  Muskegon  Lake, Fox Fiver.
AMIC-832U
 "CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF OCEAN USIBG A DIRECT MEASURING CCEANOGRAPHIC ELECTROCHEMICAL
PROBE", Kaplan, I. R., Ben-Yaakov, S., University of California, Department of Geology,
Los Angeles, California, Report No. UCLA-3l;P-178X3,  Contract No. AT(Olt-3)-3U,  1972,
156 pp.

          These studies were primarily concerned with the investigation of carbonate
saturation in the ocean by the application of an in  situ  probe.  The method involved
the construction of an electrochemical measurement system which was used to depths
of 4,500 m.  A glass electrode was allowed to reach  equilibrium with a calcium carbonate
suspension and the changes in pH were measured.   This pH change could then be  related
to the degree of saturation of the carbonate  In seawater.  Studies also were undertaken
to measure ionic diffusion from seawater to less dilute solutions.  It was established
that ionic complexing may extensively modify  the fluxee of migrating ions.  Theoretical
studies were conducted on the effect of complexlng on the apparent dissociation
constants in the carbonate system.  It was shown that these could change significantly
in Interstitial waters having approximately the  same ionic strength of seawater,  but  a
different composition.   A study was also made of the C02-O2 system in the North
Eastern Pacific.   Variations in COS and 02 were  related to production and consumption
rates and to mixing models of ocean currents.

INDEX TERMS:   Sea water.  Chemical analysis. Electrochemistry,  Hydrogen ion concentration,
      Pacific Ocean,  Mixing,  Carbon dioxide. Dissolved oxygen,  Saline water, On-site
      investigations, Aquatic productivity, Methodology, Electrochemical probe, Ionic
      diffusion, Carbonate  saturation. Chemical composition, Glass electrodes.
 See  also:   Category 1, AMIC-8016,  8018, 8257
             Category 2, AMIC-7731.
                                                                                         60

-------